GIÁO ÁN TIẾNG ANH 6 FRIENDS PLUS CẢ NĂM THEO CÔNG VĂN 5512 (2 CỘT) NĂM HỌC 2021-2022

Page 1

GIÁO ÁN TIẾNG ANH FRIENDS PLUS

vectorstock.com/7952556

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection

GIÁO ÁN TIẾNG ANH 6 FRIENDS PLUS CẢ NĂM THEO CÔNG VĂN 5512 (2 CỘT) NĂM HỌC 2021-2022 WORD VERSION | 2022 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM

Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594


Week : 01 Period: 01

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

INTRODUCTION

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - know something about England. - understand something about English and have the effective ways to learn it. 2. Qualities: - Having improved their knowledge and understanding of the English language. - Having developed their own reading, writing, speaking and listening skills. - Having developing their ability to use English in the classroom and for other professional contexts. - Having become more fluent and confident in their use of English. 3. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents BREAKING THE ICE: Snowball fight. ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Break the ice and make the students feel a lot more enthused and comfortable about learning. v Contents: Students play game. v Products: Students can learn three things about their new friend. v Organization: - Teacher have students write three things about themselves on a piece of paper. Then have them crumble up the paper to resemble a snowball. Let the students have a snowball fight for about one minute. After that, everyone grabs one of the snowballs and has to try and find the person who wrote on it. Once they find their partner, they have to bring that person up in front of the class and explain what they learned about their new friend with the three facts written on the piece of paper.


L

FI CI A

OF

2. The English 6 – Friends plus: - The Student Book contains: • a Starter unit to revise basic vocabulary and grammar. • eight teaching units; each unit has two vocabulary sections, two or more grammar presentations, and two listening and reading sections. There is practice of the four skills throughout. Each unit has a whole page devoted to speaking skills and a whole page devoted to writing skills. • four Progress Review after every two units with self assessments and I can ... statement and eight CLIL and Culture sections which provide revision of all the language studied up to that point in the book, as well as additional cultural information. • twenty pages of English 6 - Friends Plus Options which include: – eight Extra listening and speaking pages to give further practice in these skills. – eight Puzzles and Games pages to revise language studied. – four Song pages which provide a further opportunity for consolidation. • a Reference section which include. - The Workbook contains: • six pages of additional practice for each of the Student Book units. This comprises exercises for vocabulary, grammar, reading and writing at three levels of difficulty. • four pages of Cumulative review which provide revision of all the language and skills studied up to a particular point in the Student Book.

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can understand something about English 6 – Friends plus books. v Contents: Students work in groups to study about English 6 – Friends plus books. v Products: Students know clearly about Student book & Workbook. v Organization:

1. England: is a country that is part of the United Kingdom. It shares land borders with Wales to its west and Scotland to its north. The Irish Sea lies northwest of England and the Celtic Sea to the southwest. England is separated from continental Europe by the North Sea to the east and the English Channel to the south. The country covers five-eighths of the island of Great Britain, which lies in the North Atlantic, and includes over 100 smaller islands, such as the Isles of Scilly and the Isle of Wight.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Students can learn something about England. v Contents: Introduce England. v Products: Students’ understanding. v Organization: - Teacher asks students some questions about England: ? What do you know about England? - Students work in groups to talk about England in Vietnamese. - Teacher calls out some students to answer the questions. - Students answer. - Teacher gives students something about England and English.

DẠ

Y

M

- Teacher has students to open and see briefly the student book and workbook. Then ask: ? “What do the student book and work book contain?” - Students work in groups to do the task. - Teacher checks the answer with class. Then, teacher introduces the English 6 – Friends plus: Student book and Workbook. - Students listen carefully.


L

FI CI A

OF

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare new lesson.

3. How to learn English well. - English is used all over the world in every aspect of life. - It’s the international language of every fields: communication, trade, economic, cooperation...... - English is not too difficult but it requires your working hard. - Focusing on vocabulary you come across. Write sentence with the new words to understand more - Review the lesson everyday. - Practise English everyday

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Students can use the knowledge which they have learnt to find the way to learn English well. v Contents: Students write sentences about their ways in individual. Then, tell the class about them. v Products: Six sentences about students’ ways to learn English. v Organization: - Teacher asks students work in pairs to find 6 ways to learn English well. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher calls out some students to answer. Check the answer with class. Add more information.

• a Reference section which includes: additional Language focus practice exercises for each grammar point; a Key phrases section with Key phrases from the Student Book; an Irregular verbs list, and Everyday English phrases.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

PROGRESS REVIEW 1

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 1. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Student can revise their knowledge. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 1 to 7. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise about the language they have studied in Unit 1. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 1. v Organization: - Teacher reminds the knowledge to students. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

I. Theory 1. Vocabulary - Places in a town or city restaurant, school, park, etc. 2. Language focus - Is there … ?, Are there … ?. - How many … ? - Comparative adjectives. - Position of adjectives and Compound sentences


L

FI CI A

OF

READING: A description of a cruise ship 2. Choose the correct answers. Suggested answers 1. b, library 2. a, chefs 3. c, exciting 4. a, cabins 5. c, fantastic 6. a, swimming pools

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner. - Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner. - Teachers check the answers again with class.

II. Exercises VOCABULARY: Places in a town or city 1. Complete the words in the text. Suggested answers 1. restaurant 2. café 3. sports centre 4. park 5. hotel 6. cinema 7. theatre 8. school

ƠN

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Is there … ?, Are there … ?, How many … ? 3. Write questions and short answers. Suggested answers 1. Is there a big cinema in your area? No, there isn’t. 2. Are there any interesting monuments in this town? Yes, there are. 3. Is there a quiet park near the station? Yes, there is. 4. Are there any small shops in that street? No, there aren’t. 5. How many cafés are there near here? There are three. 6. How many students are there in Anna’s class? There are thirty. VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Comparing places


FI CI A

L

4. Lucy is a new student at a school. Listen to Lucy talking to her teacher. Match the places in A with the adjectives in B. Suggested answers 1. e, noisy 2. a, quiet 3. f, modern 4. b, pretty 5. c, dangerous 6, d, clean

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ comprehension. v Organization: - Teacher summary the lesson for students. - Students listen carefully.

ƠN

OF

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Comparative adjectives 5. Choose the correct words and write them on the lines. Suggested answers 1. b, than 2. a, better 3. b, friendlier 4. c, more 5. a, bigger 6. c, cleaner

DẠ

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare new lesson.

SPEAKING: Asking and saying where places are 6. Put the dialogue in the correct order. number the sentences. Suggested answers a–5 b–4 c–1 d–6 e–3 f–2 WRITING: A description of a town or city 7. order the words to make sentences. Suggested answers 1. Norwich is a very interesting city. 2. It’s in the east of England. 3. It’s got a population of about 200,000. 4. My favourite place is the castle. 5. There are some fantastic shops. 6. There’s a good market too. 7. It’s only thirty-five kilometres from the sea. 8. It’s an exciting place.

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

PROGRESS REVIEW 1 (Cont’)

L

Week : Period:

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 2. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Student can revise their knowledge. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 8 to 15. - Students do the task individually.

I. Theory 1. Vocabulary - Daily routines, get up, have classes, study, etc.

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE

II. Exercises

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise about the language they have studied in Unit 2. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 2. v Organization: - Teacher reminds the knowledge to students. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

2. Language focus - Adverbs of frequency. - Present simple: affirmative and negative. - Present simple: questions; Simple sentences - “Also”


FI CI A

L

VOCABULARY: Daily routines 8. Complete the sentences with the words. Suggested answers 1. get 2. have 3. brush; wash 4. go 5. chat 6. help 7. study 8. relax; watch READING: My family 9. Complete the words in the text. Suggested answers 1. brothers 2. mother 3. aunt 4. father 5. grandmother 6. grandfather

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner. - Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

- Teachers check the answers again with class.

ƠN

OF

v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Present simple: af f irmative and negative 10. Make the negative sentences affirmative and the affirmative sentences negative. Suggested answers 1. I like cooking. 2. We play football every afternoon. 3. She washes the car. 4. They don’t help with the housework. 5. My brother doesn’t study in the evenings. 6. You don’t play video games VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Special days 11. Listen and draw lines from names 1–6 to people a–f in the picture. Suggested answers 1. Dad – e 2. Emma – c 3. Grace – d 4. Holly – b 5. Mum – f 6. Richard – a


FI CI A

L

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Present simple: questions 12. Read the email and write the questions. Suggested answers 1. What time do you get up? 2. do you have a big breakfast? 3. Does she help at home? 4. does Anna study a lot? 5. When do they get home from work? 6. Do your parents watch TV in the evening?

WRITING: A special day 14. Complete the text with the words. There are five extra words. Suggested answers 1. day 2. streets 3. play 4. also 5. like 15. Choose the best title for the text. Tick (✔) one box. Suggested answers A special day in the USA

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ comprehension. v Organization: - Teacher summary the lesson for students. - Students listen carefully.

ƠN

OF

SPEAKING: Making plans and suggestions 13. Complete the dialogue with the phrases. Suggested answers 1. What’s on? 2. What do you want 3. I’m not really interested 4. I like the sound 5. what about 6. Let’s go

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare for the Mid term I – test.

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

PROGRESS REVIEW 2

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 3. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Student can revise their knowledge. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 1 to 8. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise about the language they have studied in Unit 3. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 3. v Organization: - Teacher reminds the knowledge to students. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks. ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE

I. Theory 1. Vocabulary - Animals: camel, butterfly, snake, etc. 2. Language focus - Superlative adjectives. - can for ability; might - Questions with How … ? - Giving examples. II. Exercises VOCABULARY: Animals 1. Complete the words in the sentences. Suggested answers


L FI CI A

OF

READING: The ugliest animals? 2. Choose the correct words and complete the text. Suggested answers 1. a, rarest 2. c, beautiful 3. b, ugly 4. c, dull 5. b, colourful 6. a, more common LANGUAGE FOCUS: Superlative adjectives 3. Complete the sentences with a superlative adjective. Suggested answers 1. the quietest 2. the biggest 3. the most interesting 4. the worst 5. the ugliest 6. the most beautiful 7. the most common 8. the best

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner. - Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner. - Teachers check the answers again with class.

1. rabbit 2. frog 3. octopus 4. camel 5. butterfly 6. fish

ƠN

v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Amazing animals 4. Listen to the radio programme about polar Suggested answers 1. False 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. True 6. False LANGUAGE FOCUS: can for ability; Questions with How … ?


FI CI A

L

5. Write questions and short answers with can. Suggested answers 1. Can Freddie swim? No, he can’t. 2. Can Anna and Kate swim? Yes, they can. 3. Can Freddie speak French? Yes, he can. 4. Can Anna and Kate speak French? No, they can’t. 5. Can Freddie play basketball? No, he can’t. 6. Can Anna and Kate play basketball? Yes, they can.

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ comprehension. v Organization: - Teacher summary the lesson for students. - Students listen carefully.

ƠN

OF

6. Complete the questions with How and one of the words. Suggested answers 1. How far 2. How tall 3. How fast 4. How heavy 5. How many 6. How rare

DẠ

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare new lesson.

SPEAKING: Asking for permission 7. Complete the dialogue with the words. There are five extra words. Suggested answers 1. OK 2. afraid 3. but 4. I 5. can 6. Thanks WRITING: Animals in danger 8. Order the words to make sentences. Suggested answers 1. live in the mountains of China. 2. can weigh up to 160 kilos. 3. panda is now in danger. 4. one of the rarest creatures in the world. 5. worst problem is human activity like farming. 6. can get information from websites such as Save the Panda!


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

PROGRESS REVIEW 2 (Cont’)

L

Week : Period:

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 4. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Student can revise their knowledge. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 9 to 16. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise about the language they have studied in Unit 4. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 4. v Organization: - Teacher reminds the knowledge to students. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

I. Theory 1. Vocabulary - School subjects: maths, English, history, etc. - Verbs: Studying a language 2. Language focus - Present continuous: affirmative and negative. - Present continuous: questions. - Present continuous and present simple. - “So” II. Exercises VOCABULARY: School subjects


FI CI A

L

9. Look at the photos. Complete the sentences with school subjects or school words. Suggested answers 1. science 2. notebook 3. geography 4. maths 5. History 6. ICT READING: Schools project 10. Choose the correct word. Suggested answers 1. c, boat 2. a, boarding 3. b, private 4. a, primary 5. c, secondary

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner.

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Present continuous: af f irmative and negative 11. Write affirmative or negative sentences using the present continuous. Suggested answers 1. I’m studying two languages. 2. The students aren’t wearing school uniforms. 3. He’s chatting to his best friend. 4. She isn’t running for the school bus. 5. We’re having a break from the lesson. 6. I’m not learning a musical instrument.

NH

- Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner.

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

- Teachers check the answers again with class.

VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Verbs: Studying a language 12. Listen to Jack talking about his learning strategies and tick (✔) the correct boxes. Suggested answers 1 P write vocabulary in a notebook 2 P repeat new words 3 P practise pronunciation 4 O check words in a dictionary 5 O ask questions in class 6 P read comics 7 g listen to songs 8 O concentrate at home


FI CI A

L

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Present continuous: questions 13. Order the words to make questions. Suggested answers 1. Are those students having a break? 2. Are we learning these new words? 3. Is Eva making some notes? 4. Why are you running to school? 5. Where are those animals going? 6. What is Robert doing now?

NH

ƠN

OF

14. Complete the sentences using the present continuous or present simple form of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. swims 2. ’re revising 3. Do; like 4. don’t live 5. Is; doing 6. goes 7. isn’t listening

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ comprehension. v Organization: - Teacher summary the lesson for students. - Students listen carefully.

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare for the End of term I - test.

SPEAKING: Asking for help when you’re studying 15. Read the dialogue and choose the best answer. Write a letter (A–D) for each answer. Suggested answers 1. B, What are you doing? 2. C, How do you say ‘car’ in French? 3. D, Can you say that again, please? 4. A, How do you spell that? WRITING: An email about your school 16. Complete the text with the words. There are five extra words. Suggested answers 1. happy 2. big 3. so 4. finish 5. break 6. compulsory 7. optional


Week : 01 Period: 02

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT

FI CI A

Lesson 1: Vocabulary Free time

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Say questions and answers with the correct information. - Develop students’ speaking and listening skills. - Talking about their own hobbies and interests. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents - Sing a song:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Students can talk about some activities in their free time. ❖ Contents: Students sing a song “ Free time song” ❖ Products: Some activities in free time. ❖ Organization: - Teacher has students sing the song. - Students sing along. - Teacher calls out some students to answer the question: ? “What do you do in your free time?” (Explain the meaning of “free time”, if necessary). Elicit answers from individual students and write useful vocabulary on the board. (E.g. play football, go shopping..) - Students answer. - Teacher has students ask the other ones in the class.

(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lfLGtb258fM)

- T: What do you do in your free time? Sts: I listen to music, watch films, and play games, ...


OF

Suggested answers 1. chatting online 3. meeting friends 5. photography 7. sport 9. music 11. watching TV 13. skateboarding 15. shopping

FI CI A

L

1. Match the words in the box with pictures 1-15. Then listen and check.

2. reading 4. art 6. cycling 8. animals 10. video games 12. films 14. cooking

NH

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can learn some new words about activities in free time. ❖ Contents: Students match the words in the box with pictures, then listen and check. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. ❖ Organization: -Teacher has students work in pairs to match the words with the pictures. - Students do as required. - Teacher plays the audio for students to listen and check their answers. (Explain the meaning of words, if necessary). Then, asks students which of these activities they like doing.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students read and complete the text with the words in the box. Then read, listen and check their answers. - Students look at the key phrases and listen, then complete the phrases. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher explains the meaning of some phrases in the text before doing. - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks. - Teacher calls out some students to read the words aloud. Then, asks students to do the task in individual. - Students do as required. - Teacher has students compare the answers with their partner before checking. Then, plays the audio for students to check their answers. - Teacher reads through the key phrases with the class and make sure students understand them all.

2. Read and complete the text with the words in the box. Then read, listen and check your answers. New words - be interested in (v) (exp.) - be into (v) (exp.) - be good at (v) (exp.) - favourite (n) (exam)

Suggested answers 1. Music 2. Chatting 3. Video games 4. Skateboarding 5. Reading 6. Photography 7. Cooking 3. Look at the Key Phrases and listen. What do the people say? Complete the phrases. Suggested answers 1. music


2. cycling 3. films and watching TV 4. reading 5. shopping and meeting friends 6. chatting online 7. skateboarding 8. art 9. animals, dogs

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge which they have learnt to write and talk about their interests. ❖ Contents: Students write six sentences about their interests in individual. Then, tell the class about them. ❖ Products: Six sentences about students’ interests. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to write six sentences about their interests. Encourage them to use a range of different key phrases. - Students write down and then work in pairs to compare their interests from exercise 4. - Tecaher asks some students to tell the class about their interests. - Student do as required.

4. Write six sentences about your interests. Use the Key Phrases in exercise 3 and the words in exercise 1. (Students’ own answers)

OF

FI CI A

L

- Students listen carefully and take note. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and complete the phrases. - Teacher play the audio again, if necessary, pausing to allow students time to write. - Teacher has students exchange the answers with their partner. Then, shows the answers with the class and ask students which of the sentences are true for them.

ƠN

Example - I’m into sport. - I’m not good at music.

QU Y

NH

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your interests in exercise 4. (Students’ own answers)

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.4). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 01 Period: 03

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT

FI CI A

Lesson 2: Language focus • Be: affirmative and negative • Subject pronouns and possessive adjectives • Object pronouns

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Learn how to use the verb " to be" in the present time. - Learn how to introduce people. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson:

Y

M

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce verb “BE”. ❖ Contents: Students find the missing words a, I ....... into going swimming. in individual. ❖ Products: Forms of verb “BE”: is, am, are. ❖ Organization: b, Ana ...... good at cooking. - With books closed, teacher asks students to fill the missing words in some sentences on the board. c, They ..... interested in movie. - Students do as directed. Key: a, am b, is c, are - Teacher elicits that these are forms of the => forms of the verb “BE”. verb “BE”.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know: - How to use “BE” in affirmative and negative forms.

 Be: affirmative and negative

* Usage: - To describe something or someone. - To talk about names, ages, feeling, nationalities, ... * Form:


L FI CI A

OF

* Note: The short forms (’m, ’s, isn’t, aren’t, etc.) are much more common than the full forms, especially in spoken English.  Subject pronouns and possessive

ƠN

adjectives * Example: - I’m a teacher. It’s my book. - You’re a student. It’s your book. * Usage: - The subject of a sentence is a person or thing that performs the action of the verb. Subject pronouns are used to replace the subject (person or thing) of a verb. - The possessive adjectives are: my, your, his, her, its, our, their, and whose. A possessive adjective sits before a noun (or a pronoun) to show who or what owns it. * Note: The possessive adjective “their” is often confused with the adverb “there” and the verb form “they’re (they are)”. The possessive adjective “its” can be confused with the verb form “it’s (it is)”.

QU Y

NH

- Distinguish the subject pronouns and possessive adjectives from object pronouns. ❖ Contents: - Teacher explains how to use: + Be: affirmative and negative. + Subject pronouns and possessive adjectives. + Object pronouns. - Students listen and coppy down in their notebooks. ❖ Products: Students can understand the usage of: - “BE” in affirmative and negative forms. - Subject pronouns and possessive adjectives. - Object pronouns. ❖ Organization: Be: affirmative and negative - Teacher explains the usage of the verb “BE” and gives the full and short forms of “BE” in affirmative/ negative forms. - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks. Subject pronouns and possessive adjectives - Teacher holds up a book and say: “I’m a teacher. It’s my book” then points to a student and say: “You’re a student. It’s your book”. After that, write these sentences on the board and give the usage of the subject pronouns and possessive adjectives. - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks.

M

- Teacher asks students to give some more examples. - Students work in pairs.

Object pronouns

DẠ

Y

- Teacher explains about the object pronouns. - Students listen then coppy down their notebooks. - Teacher calls out some students to give examples. - Students do as required.

 Object pronouns

* Usage: - The object pronouns are: me, you, him, her, it, us, them. - An object pronoun functions as the object of a verb or a preposition. - An object pronoun comes after either a verb or a preposition.


L FI CI A OF

ƠN

1. Complete the table with the words in the box. Then check your answers in the text on page 6. Suggested answer 1. He 2. They 3. not 4. isn’t 5. aren’t

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students complete the table with the words then check their answers in pairs. - Students use affirmative and negative forms of the verb “BE” in groups of 4. - Replace the words with subject pronouns in individual. - Match the object pronouns with the subject pronouns in individual. - Circle the word that has different stress from the other three in individual. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to work in pairs to complete the table then check the answers with their partners in the text on page 6. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class. (With weaker classes, work through this exercise with the whole class, eliciting the missing words). Exercise 2: - Teacher checks that students understand “zebras”. - Teacher has students work in groups of 4 to complete the sentences with the correct forms so that they are true. - Students work in groups of 4 to do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class. (With stronger classes, students could write one or two more true sentences using different forms of “BE”).

2. Write true sentences. Use affirmative and negative forms of the verb be. - zebras (n) (exp.) Suggested answer 1. are 2. isn't 3. are/aren't 4. is 5. 'm/am not 6. 'm/am not

DẠ

Y

3. Complete the table with the words in blue in the text on page 6. Suggested answer Exercise 3: 1. your - Teacher has students work in pairs to 2. his complete the table with the correct words. 3. her - Students do as required. 4. our - Teacher checks answers with the class. (With 5. your weaker classes, work through this exercise 6. their with the whole class, eliciting the missing words) 4. Replace the words in blue with subject pronouns.


QU Y

L

FI CI A

NH

Exercise 6: - Teacher allows students time to read the introduction. Model pronunciation of “answer” and “machine”, where the primary stress is on different syllables. Make students pay attention to the fact that in English most two-syllable nouns have the first stress but some have the second stress. - Students listen carefully and do the task as directed.

OF

Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to work in individual to match the object pronouns with the subject pronouns. - Students do the task. - Teacher check answers with the class.

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads out the example. Then, has students work in individual to replace the blue words with the correct pronouns. - Students do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answer 1. It 2. they 3.We 4. You 5. Match the object pronouns in the box with the subject pronouns. Suggested answer 1. you 2. it 3. him 4. her 5. us 6. you 7. them 6. Circle the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress. * Note: In English, most two-syllable nouns have the first stress but some have the second stress.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge they have learnt to talk about their interests in the class. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to talk then change pairs and say something about their first partner. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the example dialogue. - Students work in pairs to tell each other about themselves and their interests using the structures in the table in exercise 1. Then they change pairs and tell their new partner something about their first partner. - Teacher checks and encourages students (gives mark, if they do well).

Suggested answer 1-c 2-d 3-d 5-d 6-b 7-c

4-c 8-b

9-c

7. USE IT! Work in pairs. Talk about you and your interests. Use ideas from exercise 1, page 6. Then change pairs and say something about your first partner. (Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.5). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 02 Period: 04

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT Prepositions and everyday objects

FI CI A

Lesson 3: Vocabulary

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use prepositions to say where things are. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce some prepositions and everyday objects. ❖ Contents: Students watch a video clip. ❖ Products: Students know some prepositions; every day objects. ❖ Organization: - Teacher plays the video clip, asks students watch carefully then answer some questions. - Students do as required.

DẠ

Y

- Teacher asks students: ? “Where is her hat?” ? “Where are her glasses?” ........ - Students answer. - Teacher lead in the new lesson.

(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PKFgBK5fbfc)

- Where is her hat? It’s under the chair. - Where are her glasses? They’re on the desk. ........ => hat, glasses, coat, table....are everyday objects. => under, on, behind....are prepositions.


OF

FI CI A

L

1. Match the words in the box with 1–16 in the pictures. Then listen and check.

ƠN

Suggested answer 1. poster 2. speaker 4. table 5. drawer 7. clock 8. board 10. shelf 11. pen 13. desk 14. coat 16. bag

3. laptop 6. mobile phone 9. dictionaries 12. notebook 15. chair

NH

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know: - Some new words about everyday objects. - The meaning and usage of prepostions. ❖ Contents: - Students work in pairs to match the words with the pictures, then listen and check. - Study the prepositions. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words and some prepositions of place. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks student to look at the pictures, work in pairs to match the words with these objects. - Students do as required. - Teacher plays the audio for students to listen and check their answers. (Explain the meaning of words, if necessary). Then, asks students where they are. (The students’ answers can be in Vietnamese) - Students answer.

QU Y

2. Study the prepositions. Then complete the sentences with the prepositions. Listen and check.  Study the prepositions

M

- Teacher asks students to focus on the pictures. Then, read out each preposition in turn and elicit the meaning in the students’ own language. - Student do as directed.

- Teacher gives an example, then has students take turn to make the sentences with the prepositions above. - Student make more similar examples.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students work in groups to complete the sentences. - Student draw and write sentences about their pictures in individual.

* Example: T: The frog is on the box. St.A: The frog is near the box. St.B: The frog is under the box. ......  Complete the sentences with the

prepositions. Listen and check. Suggested answer 1. on 2. in 3. between 4. under 5. next to 6. on


L

FI CI A

3. Draw a desk and four other objects. Write sentences about your picture. Beginning with the sentence: In my picture, a laptop is on the.......... (Students’ own answers)

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Read your sentences in exercise 3 to your partner. Listen and draw your partner’s picture. (Students’ own answers)

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge they have learnt to talk about the positions of the everyday objects. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to listen and draw again their partner’s picture. ❖ Products: Students’ pictures. ❖ Organization: - Teacher puts students into pairs. They take turns reading their descriptions to each other and draw their partner’s desk from the description. - Students do the task, then they check their drawings against the originals. See who managed to draw their partner’s desk accurately. - Teacher checks again and encourages students (gives mark, if they do well).

8. near 10. on

OF

- Teacher allows students have time to draw a picture and write about their picture. - Students do as required individually. - Teacher observes students’ working. (When they finish, give some comments with their pictures, if necessary).

7. under 9. opposite

ƠN

❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads out the first gapped sentence and refer students back to the pictures in exercise 1. Elicit the correct preposition (on). Then, asks students to work in pairs to do the rest of the sentences with the prepositions. - Students listen carefully, then do the task as directed. - Teacher plays the audio for them to check the answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.6). - Prepare new lesson.

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 02 Period: 05

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT

FI CI A

Lesson 4: Language focus • Possessive ’s • Be: questions • Possessive pronouns

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask questions with be about where people and things are. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce some “possessive ’s” and “possessive pronouns” ❖ Contents: Ask and answer about students’ objects in the class. ❖ Products: Students know “possessive ’s” and “possessive pronouns” ❖ Organization: - With books closed, teacher asks a student to hold up his/her school bag. ? “Is this your school bag?” - Student A answer. “Yes, it is”. (Repeat the process with another student and his/her partner’s notebook or pen) - Teacher elicits the answer: a. “It’s mine” b. “It’s C’s pen”

Example: a. T: Is this your school bag? St. A: Yes, it is. It’s mine. b T: Is that your pen? St. B: No, it isn’t. My pen is here. It’s C’s pen. => “mine” is possessive pronoun. => “C’s” is possessive ’s  Possessive ’s


Example:

L

Noun

FI CI A

Noun 's or noun s' Ana's Ana and Emma's My parents' My children's

pen house house toys

OF

* Usage: We use possessive 's to say that something or someone belongs to a person, is connected to a place, or to show the relationship between people. The possessive 's always comes after a noun.

ƠN

 Be: questions

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know: - The usage of the possessive ’s. - How to make questions with “be” - The possessive pronouns. ❖ Contents: - Teacher explains how to use: + The possessive ’s. + “Be” in question form. + Possessive pronouns. - Students listen and coppy down in their notebooks. ❖ Products: Students can understand the usage of the possessive ’s, the possessive pronouns and “be” in question form. ❖ Organization: Possessive ’s - Teacher gives some examples and show the possessive ’s. Then, explain the usage of them. - Teacher emphasizes: “In spoken English, there is no difference between the student’s books and the students’ books. When doing listening exercises, students should therefore always think about the number of people being referred to.” - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks. Be: questions - Teacher reminds students about the usage of “be” in affirmative and negative forms. Then show students where to put “be” in question form. - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks.

DẠ

Y

Possessive pronouns - Teacher gives students some examples. After that, explain about the possessive pronouns for students. - Students listen then coppy down their notebooks. - Teacher calls out some students to give some more examples. - Students do as required.

- To form questions, we put be before the subject. Example: Are you at home? (NOT You are at home?)  Possessive pronouns

Example: This is our house. It's ours. This is my bedroom. It's mine. This is my brother's bike. It's his. * Note: - The words "mine, yours, his, hers, its, ours, theirs" are possessive pronouns. They show who or what something belongs to. - The possessive pronoun for it is its, but this isn’t often used in natural conversation.


Suggested answer 1. singular 2. plural

FI CI A

L

1. Look at the examples and complete the Rules with singular and plural.

OF

2. Read and listen to the text. Choose the correct answers. Suggested answer 1. at home 2. in the drawer 3. Charlie’s room

ƠN

3. Read the dialogue again and complete the table.

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students work in pairs to complete the rules. - Students read and listen to the text in individual to choose the correct answers. - Students work in pairs to complete the table. - Students write phrases with possessive pronouns in individually. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to read the examples, then complete the rules. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher calls out some students to read through the rules with the class. - Students answer. - Teacher elicits the correct answers. Exercise 2: - Teacher allows students time to read through the three sentences. Then, play the audio. - Students read and listen, then choose the correct answers in individually. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 3: - Teacher has students read the dialogue again then work in pairs to complete the table. - Students do the task in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to complete the table with the correct possessive pronouns from the box. - Students do the task in individually. - Teacher checks answers by reading out the possessive adjective and asking volunteers to say the corresponding pronoun. Exercise 5:

DẠ

- Teacher has students practise using the possessive pronouns in sentences. - Students do the task. - Teacher check answers with the class.

Suggested answer 1. Is 2. Are 3. I’m not 4. is 5. aren’t 4. Match the possessive pronouns in the box with the possessive adjectives. Suggested answer 1. his 2. hers 3. ours 4. yours 5. theirs 5. Write phrases with possessive pronouns. Suggested answer 2. This is his. 3. This is hers. 4. This is ours. 5. This is yours. 6. This is theirs


QU Y

L

FI CI A OF

(Students’ own answers)

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.7). - Prepare new lesson.

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Look at the table below. Choose a person, a city and a place. Then ask questions to find out your partner’s information.

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge they have learnt to do the task. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to ask questions and guess their partner’s information. ❖ Products: Students’ talking. ❖ Organization: - Teacher puts students into pairs to ask questions and guess their partner’s information. (Teacher could make the activity competitive by telling students to count how many questions they take to guess the answer. The student who uses the fewest questions wins). - Students do as required. - Teacher gives some comments and encourages students to be self-confident.

DẠ

Y

M

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 02 Period: 06

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT

FI CI A

Lesson 5: Vocabulary Basic adjectives

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use basic adjectives to describe things. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce some basic adjectives. ❖ Contents: Students compare a motorbike with a Ferrari car. ❖ Products: Some adjectives. ❖ Organization: - With books closed, teacher shows 2 pictures about a motorbike and a Ferrari car. Elicit that they are both vehicles. Ask: ? “What’s the difference between them?” - Students answer. - Teacher elicits a few ideas and elicits adjectives such as: big, small, fast, slow. Then, write these on the board and explain that they are adjectives, and we use them to describe things. ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know some new adjectives.

- Big, small, fast, slow => adjectives. 1. Read the text. Match the words in blue with their opposites in the box. Then listen and check. Suggested answer nice – horrible old – new


L

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

slow – fast good – bad expensive – cheap small – big popular – unpopular interesting – boring

2. Read the text again and choose the correct answers. Suggested answer 1. b 2. a 3. a * Note: The position of adjectives before the noun. Example: a good camera (NOT a camera good). 3. Study the Key Phrases. Write 8 sentences about the things in the table. Use your ideas and the Key Phrases. * Note: The different adverbs of degree: isn’t very < quite < very < really

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to match the words in blue with their opposites in the box, then listen and check. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of some new adjectives. ❖ Organization: - Teacher has students read the text and match the adjectives in blue with their opposites in the box. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher allows students to compare their answers in pairs then play the audio. - Students listen and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class, and check that students understand all the adjectives (Explain the meaning of them, if necessary). ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students read the text again and choose the correct answers in individual. - Students study the Key Phrases, then write 8 sentences about the things in the table in individual. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to read the text again and choose the correct answers. - Students do the task in individual. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Point out the position of adjectives before the noun, e.g. a good camera (NOT a camera good). - Students listen carefully and take note. Exercise 3: - Teacher reads through the key phrases with the class. Point out the difference in meaning between the different adverbs of degree. (Teacher could get students to translate the phrases into their own language to check understanding). - Students listen carefully then take note. - Teacher focuses on the table and read out the example answer. Elicit one or two more

Suggested answer 1. Pho is a popular food of Vietnam. 2. This film is so boring. 3. My phone has a good camera.


FI CI A

L

4. This castle is old. 5. My dad's laptop is very expensive. 6. My mother buys me a new book. 7. Soccer is an interesting sport. 8. I have a nice dress.

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your sentences in exercise 3.

ƠN

OF

(Students’ own answers)

QU Y

NH

examples about TV programmes, people, games or films. Then has students write 8 sentences similarly. - Students write their sentences individually. - Teacher allows students time to do the task. After that, ask one or two students to read their sentences to the class. (Correct any errors). ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge they have learnt to talk about anything in Excercise 3. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to compare their sentences in exercise 3. ❖ Products: Students’ sentences. ❖ Organization: - Teacher has students work in pairs to compare their sentences from exercise 3. Ask students if any of their sentences were the same. - Students do the task as directed. - Teacher calls out some pairs to tell their sentences in front of class. (Correct any errors, or give mark if they do well to encourage them to be self-confident). ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.8). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 03 Period: 07

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT

FI CI A

Lesson 6: Language focus • This, that, these, those • Have got

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “have got” to ask and answer questions about presents. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce some demonstrative pronouns. ❖ Contents: Students watch a video clip, then role – play. ❖ Products: Students’ play. ❖ Organization: - Teacher shows a video clip to students, asks them listen carefully and try to remember what they say. Then choose a role and practice the role – play. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eUazfCkQq84 - Students do as directed. - Teacher elecits “this, that” from the video  This, that, these, those clip. Then, explain the meanings. ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know: - The usage of “this, that, these, those”. - How to use “have got”. ❖ Contents: * Note:


L

FI CI A

 Have got

* Usage: “have got” is used to talk mainly about possessions or personal attributes. * Form:

* Note: - We use “has” not “have” with “he, she, it” forms: She’s got a camera. NOT She have got a camera. - In questions, we put “have / has” before the subject: Have you got a book? NOT You have got a book?

QU Y

NH

Have got - Teacher explains the usage of the verb “BE” and gives the full and short forms of “BE” in affirmative/ negative forms. - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks.

- Use these/ those to talk about plural objects (more than one thing).

OF

This, that, these, those - Teacher shows a table and asks students to work in pairs to refer the differences between each example. - Students do the task. - Teacher calls out some students to answer. (Students’ answers maybe in Vietnamese). Then, elecit the meaning of “this, that, these, those”.

- Use this/ that to talk about a singular object (one thing).

ƠN

- Teacher explains the meaning of “this, that, these, those” and the usage of “have got”. - Students listen and coppy down their notebooks. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding. ❖ Organization:

between this / that and these / those?

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students distinguish the difference between this/that and these/those in individual/pairs. - Students use “have got” to do the tasks in individual/pairs. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to look at the pictures and translate the phrases into their own language. Then, answer the question. - Students do the task individually. - Teacher checks the answer with class.

1. Study the pictures. What is the difference

Suggested answer - We use this and these when the object(s) is near. - We use that and those when the object(s) is far away. 2. Choose the correct words.


L

Suggested answer 1. These 2. this 3. This 4. That 5. Are those

FI CI A

Exercise 2: - Teacher has students choose the correct words to complete the sentences in pairs. - Students work in pairs as required. - Teacher asks some students go to the board and write down their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

3. Look at the text and exercise 2 on page 10 Exercise 3: again. Complete the table. - Teacher asks students to look back at the text Suggested answer and exercise 2 on page 10 and find examples 1. ’ve of “have got”. Then, read through the table 2. haven’t and complete it. 3. hasn’t - Students do the task indiviually. 4. Has - Teacher calls out some students to give their 5. haven’t answer. Then, ask another to check if right or wrong. (Corrrect any errors). 4. Complete the dialogue with the correct forms of have got. Then listen and check. Exercise 4: Suggested answer - Teacher has students read the dialogue and 1. Have 2. have complete it with the correct words in pairs. 3. haven’t 4. ’ve - Students do the task as required. 5. Has 6. has - Teacher play the audio for them to listen and 7. ’ve 8. ’ve check. Then, check answers with the class. 5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Look at the miniACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION dialogue. Prepare and practise new ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge dialogues. Use your friends’ names and the they have learnt to do the task. ideas in the pictures. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to prepare and practice new dialogues. (Students’ own answers) ❖ Products: Students’ talking. ❖ Organization: - Teacher allows students time to read through the mini-dialogue. Focus on the pictures and make sure students know the words for all the items. Demonstrate the task with a confident student, adding in a name and a possible present. Put students into pairs to prepare and practise new dialogues. Encourage them to swap roles each time, so that they practise both roles. - Students listen carefully and do as required in pairs. - Teacher calls out some pairs to perform one of their dialogues for the class. (Give mark if they do well to encourage them).


FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.9). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 03 Period: 08

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT Countries and nationalities

FI CI A

Lesson 7: Vocabulary

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about where people and things are from. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Remind students about the names in English of some countries. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to write as many countries as possible in one minute. ❖ Products: Names in English of some countries. ❖ Organization: - Teacher writes the word “country” on the board and elicit the meaning. Elicit the names of one or two countries (e.g. England, Turkey...). Then put students into 4 groups and give them one minute to write as many countries in English as they can. - Students work in groups as directed. - Teacher brings students’ ideas together on the board and check that they understand all the country names. The group who write the most countries correctly is the winner.

Suggested answer 1. England 2. Turkey 3. Canada 4. Korea 5. Viet Nam 6. ........... 1. Match the countries with the continents.


FI CI A

L

Suggested answer Africa: Egypt, Morocco America: Canada, the USA Asia: Japan, Thailand, the Philippines, Việt Nam Australasia: New Zealand Europe: Italy, Spain, the UK

OF

2. Check the meanings of the words in blue. Then choose the correct words in the quiz. New words - people (n) (pic.)

ƠN

- flag (n) (pic.)

- sports star (n) (pic.) - capital (n) (exam.) Ha Noi is the capital of Vietnam.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know some new words and some country names. ❖ Contents: - Students works in pairs to match the countries with the continents. - Check the meanings of the words. Then choose the correct words in the quiz in individual. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of some new words, some country names. ❖ Organization: Excercise 1: - Teacher asks students to match the countries with the continents. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher plays the audio for students to check their answers. Then, check answers with the class and that students understand all the country names. Model and drill pronunciation of country names which students might find difficult (e.g. Egypt) Exercise 2: - Teacher explains the meaning of some new words before doing. Then, call out some students to read the words aloud. - Students listen carefully and coppy down in their notebooks. - Teacher asks students to read through the sentences, then choose the correct words in the quiz in individual. Then, compare with their partner. - Students do the task as required. - Teacher checks answers with the class. See who got all the correct answers.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students write nationalities for the countries in pairs. - Students write true/false information individually.

- Tom Yum (n) (pic.)

- currency (n) (pic.) Suggested answer 1. British 2. Vietnamese 3. Spanish 4. Egyptian 5. Thai 6. Australian 3. Write nationalities for the countries in exercise 1. Use words from the quiz in exercise 2. Suggested answer Country 1. The USA 2. Canada

Nationality American Canadian


4. Italy 5. Japan 6. Morocco

Italian Japanese Moroccan

7. New Zealand 8. Spain 9. Thailand

L

Egyptian

FI CI A

3.Egypy

New Zealander Spanish Thai

OF

10. The Philippines Filipino 11. The UK British 12. Vietnam Vietnamese

ƠN

4. Write true and false information for 1–5. Example: Brad Pitt is an American sports star. (False) Ferraris are Italian. (True) (Students’ own answers)

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your sentences in exercise 4. Say if you think they are true or false. (Students’ own answers)

Y

M

QU Y

NH

❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Excercise 3: - Teacher has students work in pairs and refer to the words in the quiz to write nationalities for the countries in exercise 1. - Students do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Model pronunciation of the nationalities and point out that sometimes the pronunciation of the country and nationality is slightly different, (e.g. Spain /speɪn/, Spanish /ˈspænɪʃ/, Japan /ʤəˈpæn/, Japanese /ʤæpəˈni:z/) - Students listen carefully. Excercise 4: - Teacher reads out the examples and make sure students understand the task. - Students work individually to write their sentences. - Teacher asks some students to read their sentences to the class. (Correct any errors). ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge they have learnt to talk about where people and things are from. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to compare their sentences in exercise 4. ❖ Products: Students’ sentences. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the examples. Put students into pairs to compare their sentences and decide if their partner’s sentences are true or false. See who guessed all the answers correctly. - Students do as required. ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.12). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 03 Period: 09

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

STARTER UNIT

FI CI A

Lesson 8: Language focus • Question words: Where … ?, What … ?, Who … ? • Conjunctions: and, or, but

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask questions and use conjunctions to write an email about themselves. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce some questions words. ❖ Contents: Students watch a video clip. ❖ Products: Questions words. ❖ Organization: - Teacher has students watch a video clip about some questions words. Then ask students to try to remember the names of the characters in the clip. - Students watch the clip, then list names of the characters. - Teacher elecits the question words from students’ answers.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Students can know: - How to use questions words. - The function of conjunctions: and, or, but. ❖ Contents:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Y_E-N5y1r7g

- Who, what, when, where, why, how... => Question words.  Question words: Where?, What?, Who?

Example: Where are the students? ➔They are in the classroom. - Where: is used when referring to a place or location. (= I want to know the place) Example:


L

What is your name? ➔My name is Mary. - What: is used to refer to specific information. (= I want to know the thing) Example: Who is he? ➔He is my older brother. - Who: is only used to refer to ask a person. (= I want to know a person.)

FI CI A

- Teacher explains the usage of “Where, What, Who”, the meaning and function of conjunctions “and, or, but”. - Students listen and coppy down their notebooks. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding. ❖ Organization:

NH

ƠN

OF

Question words: Where?, What?, Who? - Teacher shows examples, then explains how to use “Where, What, Who”.  Conjunctions: and, or, but - Students listen carefully and write down their - And: is used to add items to a list. notebooks. Example: I am from Vietnam and I am a student. Conjunctions: and, or, but - Or: is used to talk about options. - Teacher gives the meaning of “and, or, but”. Example: Then, ask students: You can have the blue pen or the red pen. ? “When do we use conjunctions?” - But: is used to show contrast. - Students answer. (Maybe in Vietnamese) Example: - Teacher checks answers. Then, elecit the I can speak English, but I am not very function of conjunctions. good at it. - Students listen carefully, then coppy down * Usage: Conjunctions are used to connect two their notebooks. sentences into one long sentence.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in individual / pairs / groups to do the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher discusses the meanings of the bold words with the class. - Students answer the questions then compare their answers with a partner. - Teacher checks answers with the class. See who got all the answers right. Exercise 2: - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and decide if the people’s answers are right or wrong. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 3:

1. Check the meanings of the bold words in examples 1–3. Then answer the questions. Compare with a partner. Suggested answer 1. Brazil 2. A Mexican food 3. A sports star 2. Listen to two people talking about the questions in exercise 1. Are their answers right or wrong? Suggested answer - For the first question, the woman is wrong and the man is right. - For the second and the third questions, the woman is right and the man is wrong. 3. Listen again and complete the Key Phrases. Use the words in the box. Suggested answer 1. think 2. you


L

3. sure 4. right 5. know

OF

FI CI A

4. Read the email and answer the questions. Suggested answer 1. No, she’s from the USA. 2. She’s into music, sport and cooking. 3. Hi, My, Beth, I’m, Boston, USA, I’ve, Cranville High School, Boston, Boston Celtics, What, Email, English, Spanish, I, Italian, Bye, Beth. 4. Students’ own answers

ƠN

* Note: We use capital letters for the names of people, countries / cities, teams, languages / nationalities and the first word of a sentence. 5. Complete the sentences with and, or and but. 1. or 2. and 3. but 4. or

NH

- Teacher puts students into pairs and ask them to try to complete the key phrases from memory. - Students do as directed. - Teacher plays the audio again for them to check and complete their answers. Then, check answers with the class and that students understand all the key phrases. Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to read the email and answer the questions. - Students work in groups to do the task. - Teacher gets their sub-boards and checks answers with the class. Then, remind students how to use capital letters. - Students listen carefully, and coppy down. Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to complete the sentences with the correct conjunctions. - Students do the task individually and compare their answers with their partners. - Teacher checks the answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can use the knowledge they have learnt to do the task. ❖ Contents: Students write an email individually. ❖ Products: Students’ email. ❖ Organization: - Teacher refers students back to the email in exercise 5. Read through the key phrases with the class and check that students understand them all. Remind students that they should also use “and, or, but” in their email. - Students do the task individually if have time. (If not, do as their homework.) - Teacher calls out some students to perform one of their writing. (Give mark if they do well to encourage them). ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.11). - Prepare new lesson.

6. USE IT! Write an email for the International friends website. Write about you and your family, your interests and the languages you speak. Use the Key Phrases and the model text. (Students’ own answers)

* Feedback:......................................................................................................................................


Week : 04 Period: 10

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1: TOWNS AND CITIES

FI CI A

Places in a town or city

L

Lesson 1: Vocabulary I./. OBJECTIVES

NH

ƠN

OF

1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - get some more knowledge about places in a town or city. - develop students’ speaking and listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game “GREEN BAMBOO” v Aims: Students can talk about places in a town or city. v Contents: Students apply their knowledge to the situations, then work in Ë groups to answer the questions. v Products: Students find out the clear picture behind the numbers. v Organization: - Teacher divides class into 2 groups. - There are 12 numbers about places on the screen. There is a hidden picture behind these numbers. Each group will choose a pair of number. With one correct pair, you will get 1 point. - The group has the most correct answers will be the winner. - After revealing the picture, teacher asks students a question: ? “What is the hidden picture about?”


- Teacher shows new words and uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat.

Ë The hidden picture is “LONDON CITY.”

FI CI A

& New words

L

` THINK! What famous places are there in your town or city?

- bridge (n) : cây cầu

OF

- monument (n) :đài kỷ niệm - flat (n) : căn hộ

ƠN

- Students answer “LONDON CITY.” - Teacher calls out some students to answer the question. ? “What famous place are there in your town or city?” - Students answer in their own. - Teacher leads in the new lesson. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Teacher presents new words related to places in a town or city. v Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. v Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. v Organization:

- office building (n) : cao ốc văn phòng - square (n) : bãi, quảng trường

NH

- Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words.

- shopping centre (n) : trung tâm mua sắm

- Check -up : Matching

QU Y

- Students copy down these words into their notebooks.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in individual/pairs/groups to complete the tasks. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Exercise 1: - Teacher gives students time to complete the task. (Students can discuss in groups, pairs or work individually). - Students listen and check their answers.

- sports centre (n) : trung tâm thể thao - clean (adj) >< dirty (adj) - dangerous (adj) >< safe (adj) - friendly (adj): behaving in a pleasant, kind way towards someone - modern (adj) >< old (adj) - noisy (adj) >< quiet (adj) - pretty (adj) Ex: That's a pretty hat you're wearing. 1. Match the words in the box with places 1-14 on the map of London below. There are 6 extra words, listen and check. Suggested answers 1. Library 2. Park 3. hotel 4. monument

8. market 9. cinema 10. restaurant 11. station


5. Square 6. shop 7. bus station

12. theatre 13. Bridge 14. Office building

FI CI A

L

Exercise 2: - Teacher plays the video or audio for Students 2. Watch or listen. Which places from exercise to watch or listen and note down the places 1 do the people mention? that are mentioned. Suggested answers: café, cinema, restaurant, - Students listen and note down the places. sports centre, park, library, bridge, monument, - Teacher plays the video / audio again and bus station, shop. checks students’ answers.

ƠN

OF

Exercise 3: -Teacher allows students time to read the 3. Watch or listen again and complete the gapped sentences. sentences. - Teacher plays the video / audio again for Suggested answers students to complete the sentences. 1 .theatre 2. parks 3. bridge 4. café 5. shops -Teacher checks answers with the class. 4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Talk about places in your town or city. & GRAMMAR: F There is + a /an + singular Noun F There are + plural Noun Ex: There is a cinema. There are two cinemas.

NH

Exercise 4:

- Teacher asks students to work in pairs and talk about the places in their town / city.

M

QU Y

- Teacher suggests some phrases to introduce about places and focus on the grammar points.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Students can write the sentences about their places in town or city. v Contents: Students work in groups. v Products: Student’s opinions v Organization:

F There are + SOME + plural Noun F There are + NOT + ANY + plural Noun (= there aren’t) Ex: There are some restaurants. There aren’t any restaurants. Suggested answers -There are some café and restaurants serving food all over the world. -There are some cinemas or theatres for you to relax after a hard-working day. -….. µFinish? What are the good and bad things about your town or city? Write sentences. Suggested answers Good things

Bad things


L

- air pollution - noise pollution - traffic jam in rush hour. …….

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all the new words. -Prepare for next lesson – Reading: find out some information about a cruise ship.

- a lot of entertainment facilities such as cinemas, theatres, … - trying new types of food. - earning more money. ……..

FI CI A

- Teacher asks students to work in groups and discuss about the good and bad things in their town / city. - Teacher gives students time to discuss in group and write down their opinions. - Teacher calls out some students to present their opinion in front of class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : 04 Period: 11

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

A description of a cruise ship

L

UNIT 1: TOWNS AND CITIES Lesson 2: Reading

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - know how to answer specific questions about the text. - find out more about a cruise ship. - use vocabulary items related to the issue of passage. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson:

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Students can predict the content of a text from photo. v Contents: Students work individual/ groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization:

Contents

Game: What is it? Questions: 1. This is a place where people can eat and drink. 2. People usually stay in this place when they are on vacation. 3. Where you can borrow and read books. 4. Place where you can play sport.

- Teacher explains the game

DẠ

Y

- Students have to answer all questions to find the key word. Ë The key word is “SHIP”.


FI CI A

` THINK! Where do you think is a good place for a holiday? Why?

OF

& New words - cruise ship (n) : tàu du lịch - fantastic (adj) Ex: This is a fantastic hotel. - comfortable (adj) Ex: This soft bed is very comfortable.

ƠN

- cabin (n): buồng hàng khách - passenger (n) Ex: There are many passengers on the ship. - chef (n): a person who cooks.

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Teacher presents new words related to a cruise ship. v Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. v Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. v Organization: -Teacher introduces some new words “Before reading, there are some new words in the text.” - Teacher uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. - Check-up: What and where

L

- Teacher shows the picture and leads in the lesson “This is a very special ship; This is a cruise ship.”

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop reading skill. v Contents: Students work individual/ pairs/ groups. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Pre-reading Exercise 1: - Teacher has students work in groups and discuss some facts of the cruise ship. After discussing, students have to write “TRUE” or “FALSE”. - Students will put their answers on the boards.

- swimming pool (n)

- climbing wall (n) – show picture.

& Guessing game a) There is a library and a school on the ship. (FALSE) b) There are some swimming pools on the ship. (TRUE) c) There is one café and one restaurant on the ship. (TRUE)


L

FI CI A

OF

2. Read the Skills Strategy. Then read and listen to the text and answer the questions. Suggested answers 1. Oasis of the Seas 2. More than 2,000 people work on the ship 3. There are 250 chefs. 4. Yes, it is 5. There’s a climbing wall in the sports area.

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 2: - Teacher read through the questions with the class and make sure students understand everything, then asks them to underline all the key words. - Teacher plays the recording and point out that students need to read and listen to find the specific information. - Students listen and read the text silently. - Teacher plays the recording again if necessary. - Teacher has students reread the text and underline sentences that they find the correct answers. - Teacher invites some students to write their answers and check their work. - Teacher goes back to Guessing game and gives the correct answers. Exercise 3: Optional activity - Teacher writes the numbers on the board: 50; 12.000; 6,360 - Students scan the text as quickly as possible to find out what the numbers prefer to. - Teacher points out that some of the numbers may be written as words in the text. (with stronger classes, teacher sets a time limit to make the activity competitive.) - Students show the answers - Teacher gives feedback.

& Skill Strategy. F How to answer specific questions about a text: - First, identify the key word in the question. - Next, scan the text for the key word. - Finally, you can find the correct answer in the sentence that has the key word.

ƠN

While-reading - Teacher has students open their books to page 16. - Teacher asks students to read the Skills strategy before doing exercise.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson v Contents: Students work individual v Products: Students’ comprehension v Organization: Post-reading Exercise 4:

Optional activity. Reading 50; 12.000; 6,360 Suggested answers - 50: the number of real trees on the ship - 12.000: the number of plants on the ship - 6.360: the number of passengers

4.USE IT! Work in pairs. Is the Oasis of the Seas a good place for a holiday? Why / Why not? ( Students’ own answers )


FI CI A

L

- Teacher gives the question: ? “Is the Oasis of the Seas a good place for a holiday? Why/ Why not?”. - Teacher walks around to monitor the class and offers help. - Students work in groups, they may ask for help if necessary. - Teacher invites two or three students to answer the questions. - Teacher gives feedback.

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1: TOWNS AND CITIES Lesson 3: Language focus

FI CI A

ü Is there…?/Are there …?/ How many…? ü Definite and zero article

L

Week : Period:

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer questions about places. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game : NOUGHTS AND CROSSES v Aims: Teacher elicits the last information from students about the Oasis of the Sea, library 2000 swimming pools then leads in the new lesson. 250 school climbing wall v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ sentences park 20 6360 v Organization: - Teacher divides class into 2 groups. One Ex: There is a library on the ship. group is “noughts” (O) and the other is There isn’t a school on the ship. “crosses” (X). There are 9 words and numbers about the Oasis of the Sea in the table and students have to use structure “there is/ are…..” to make sentences. - 2 groups take turns to select the boxes and make sentences with those words. The group makes the correct sentence will get an (O) or (X). - The group that has 3 O or X on a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal row will be the winner.


FI CI A

L

1. Complete the questions. Then choose the correct answers. Suggested answers 1. Is – b 2. Are – a 3. Are – b

& GRAMMAR. Review 1. THERE IS (= THERE’S) (+) : There is + a /an + singular Noun Ex: There is a pen on the desk. (-) : There is + NOT + a/an + singular Noun Ex: There is not a buffalo in the rice field. (?)Is there + a/an + singular Noun ? Ë Yes, there is / no, there isn’t Ex: Is there an eraser in your school bag? Ë No, there is not. Note : “a” : before a consonant “an” : before a vowel

ƠN

OF

- Teacher elicit ideas and write sentences with There is…/There are…on the board, then lead in new lesson. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students revise the structures: There is/are … v Contents: Students work individual v Products: Students’ answers v Organization:

NH

M

QU Y

Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to complete the sentences in 1 minute. - Teacher checks students’ answers. - Teacher reminds students how to use “There is…/ There are…”

Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students apply the structures they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in pairs/groups v Products: Students’ answers

DẠ

2. THERE ARE (=THERE’RE) (+) There are + plural Noun Ex: There are three apples in the picnic basket. (-) There are + not + ANY + plural noun (= there aren’t) Ex: There aren’t any books on the desk. (?)Are there + ANY + plural noun? Ë Yes, there are. / no, there aren’t Ex: Are there any swimming pools on the ship? Ë Yes, there are. FAsk and answer about the quantity (?) How many + plural Noun + are there…..? (+) There is/ are … Ex: How many chefs are there on the ship? There are 50 chefs.


2. Choose the correct words in the Rules. Suggested answers 1. any 2. singular nouns 3. plural nouns 4. plural nouns

Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students make questions, then compare their questions in pairs. - Teacher calls some students to answer these questions. - Students answer in their own.

3. Match 1-6 with a-f to make questions. Then write answers about your city/ town. Suggested answers 1c – 2f – 3e – 4a – 5b – 6d

FI CI A

OF

4. Complete the questions with “Is there…?/ Are there…?” and “how many….” Suggested answers 1. Are there 4. Are there 2. Is there 5. How many 3. How many

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to complete the questions then compare with their partners.

L

v Organization Exercise 2: - Students choose the correct words to complete the rules then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks grammar with the class.

Exercise 5:

NH

5. Choose the correct words in Rules. - Teacher asks students to complete the rules, Suggested answers The – no article then compare answers in pairs.

QU Y

- Teacher calls some students read aloud the Rules

M

Exercise 6: - Teacher asks students to read the sentences and decide if they need the definite or zero article. - Students compare the answers with partners. - Teacher checks students’ answers.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the structures: Is there/Are there/How many …? v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ presentation v Organization: - Teacher asks students to work in groups. (5- 6 students/ groups)

& GRAMMAR: DEFINITE AND ZERO ARTICLE FWe use THE to talk about a particular thing. FWe use ZERO ARTICLE to talk about things in general. 6. Complete the sentences with the or ⏀ Suggested answers 1.The 4. ⏀ 2.The 5. The 3.⏀ 7. USE IT! Work in groups. Ask and answer about an amusement park in your town / city. Use Is there … ?, Are there … ? and How many …? Game “I WANT TO BE A DESIGNER”


FI CI A

µFinish?

OF

(Students’ own description)

ƠN

- Students write their own description, then compare with partners - Teacher asks some fastest students to present their amusement park in front of the class, and encourage other students to ask question about each park and say which one they prefer and why.

L

- Each group will design their dream amusement park. Then, 2 members will go to the front and the other groups will ask them some questions about their amusement park by using “Is there…/Are there…; How many…?”. - Teacher gives feedbacks to the presentation.

NH

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all structures. - Prepare the next lesson

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Comparing places and things

FI CI A

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening

L

UNIT 1. TOWNS AND CITIES

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand people comparing places and things. - develop students’ listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents Game: “OPEN, SESAME!” (exercise 1 / p.18) ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students identify, understand people comparing places and things. v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization: Ë Í Exercise 1: - Teacher divides class into 2 groups, and explain the rule : There are 12 pictures and adjectives on the screen. Each group will choose a picture and its opposite word to make a complete pair. With one correct pair, you will get 1 point. The group has the most correct answers will be the winner. - Teacher asks students a question: ` THINK! Do you like modern or old places? ? “Do you like modern or old places? Why? Why?” - Students answer in their own. - Teacher leads in the lesson


L

FI CI A

OF 3. Listen to four street interviews in a radio programme. What do people talk about? Choose four topics from the box and match them to the people. Suggested answers 1. Emma – the park 2. Lukas – buses and bikes 3. Dwayne – New York 4. Chloe and Harriet – restaurants

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in pairs/groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization While-listening Exercise 3: - Teacher allows students time to read the introduction and the topics in the box. - Teacher plays the audio 3 times and asks students to listen and find out which topics the people talk about. - Teacher checks students’ answers.

2. Write sentences for the adjectives in exercise 1. Suggested answers The Vietnamese people are friendly. The school yard is noisy at break time. It’s not safe to go out at night. ……

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students apply the vocabularies to make sentences. v Contents: Students work individual/pairs v Products: Students’ answers v Organization: Pre-listening Exercise 2: - Students write sentences for the adjectives then compare their sentences in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to read their sentences to class and asks the class to correct any mistakes.

DẠ

Y

M

4. Listen again and write True or False. Correct the false sentences. Suggested answers 1. True 2. True Exercise 4: 3. False (He thinks bikes are more dangerous) - Teacher allows students time to read the 4. True sentence. 5. False (Harriet thinks that Luigi’s pizzas are - Teacher points out that in the fourth bigger) interview, Students will have to listen very carefully to know who is speaking, Harriet or 6. True Chloe. - Teacher plays the audio again. Optional activity: Listening. Answer the questions. Optional activity: 1. Who does Emma meet at the shopping centre? - Teachers asks students to answer some 2. What does Lukas say about the price of the questions buses? - Students work in pairs and discuss the 3. Where is Dwayne from? answers.


4. What does Harriet agree with Chloe about? Suggested answers 1. Her friends 2. They are expensive. 3. New York The pizzas in Gino’s are better, and the people are friendlier.

OF

6. USE IT! Work in groups. Compare your sentences in exercise 5. Which places does your group like and dislike? Compare with other groups.

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ opinion v Organization: - Teacher asks students to work in groups and discuss about which place they like and dislike. - Teacher gives students time to discuss in group and write down their opinions. - Teacher calls out some students to present their opinion in front of class.

5. Think of three places that you like in your town / city and three places that you don’t like. Write sentences and say why you like or dislike them. (Students’ own answer )

ƠN

Post-listening Exercise 5: - Students write their sentences. - Teacher asks students to read their sentences to the class. - Students answer in their own.

FI CI A

L

- Teacher checks students’ answers.

(Students’ own answer )

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1. TOWNS AND CITIES

FI CI A

Comparative adjectives

L

Lesson 5: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to compare things using comparative adjectives. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson: Contents

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students identify and understand the situation of comparing things using comparative adjectives. v Contents: Students work individual v Products: Students’ comparison v Organization: - Teacher shows the pictures and writes on the board the names of two cities that students know, then asks what they think the differences between the two cities. - Students answer on their own - Teacher elicits some examples of comparative adjectives and write them on the board.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

Hà Nội Hồ Chí Minh City Ex. Hà Nội is smaller than Hồ Chí Minh City

& GRAMMAR: COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES 1) Short adjectives (1-syllable adjectives) S1 + V + Adj-ER+ THAN+ S2 Ex: Bikes are slower than cars. 2) Long adjectives (2 or more syllable adjectives) S1 + V + MORE + ADJ + THAN + S2 Ex: French is more difficult than English. p Some special cases good → better well (healthy) → better


v Aims: Help students identify, understand how to use comparative adjectives. v Contents: Students pay attention to the structures and work individual. v Products: Students understand the structures. v Organization: - Teacher explains the grammar to students.

bad → worse far → farther/further

OF

1. Write the comparative form of the adjectives in the table. Suggested answers cleaner – slower – nicer – safer – friendlier – prettier – bigger – hotter

NH

Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to complete the table. - Students work themselves ( with weaker classes, students may work in pairs) - Teacher checks the answers.

ƠN

- Students copy down to their notebooks.

FI CI A

L

pNote: - With some 2-syllable adjectives, we can use “-er” OR “more”: quiet → quieter / more quiet clever → cleverer / more clever narrow → narrower / more narrow simple → simpler / more simple - If the adjective ends in -e, we add -r. (safe ‡ safer) - Final -y changes to -ier. (pretty ‡ prettier) - One – syllable adjective endings with vowel and one consonant, we double the consonant. (big ‡ bigger)

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in individual/pairs/groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Exercise 2: - Teacher reads out the example and elicit another example from the class. - Teacher elicits how students say than in their own language. - Students write the sentences using the comparative form and compare the answer with their partners. - Teacher checks students’ answers.

DẠ

Exercise 3: - Teacher plays the audio once for students to listen. - Teacher plays the audio again, pausing

2. Write sentences using the correct comparative form of the adjectives in brackets. How do you say “than” in your language? Suggested answers 1. It’s more expensive here than in my country. 2. The weather today is worse than it was yesterday. 3. Why is this class quieter than the other class? 4. Are the buildings in New York more modern than the buildings in Oxford? 5. This house is prettier than that house.

& PRONUNCIATION 3. Listen and repeat the example Suggested answers 1d – 2d – 3c – 4d


for students to repeat individually and chorally.

4. Read City of the Sea again. You may discover some letters pronounced differently in different words. Now indicate the word whose bold part differs from the other three in pronunciation. Suggested answers 1. d (cinemas) 2. d (cinema) 3. a (trees) 4. d (answer)

OF

2

3

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the way the use comparative adjectives to compare things. v Contents: Students work individual/pairs v Products: Students’ comparison v Organization: - Teacher shows some pairs of pictures on the screen. - Each student will choose the number and make sentences about objects or places using comparative adjectives.

µFinish? Make puzzle sentences about objects or places using comparative adjectives. Ex. It’s faster than a car, but slower than a plane. (a train) 1

NH

- Teacher asks students to make their puzzle sentences individual then swap with another fast finisher to guess the answers, then asks them to read their puzzle to the class.

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your opinions about some of the things in the box. Use the Key Phrases and comparative adjectives. Ex. Student 1: I think Hội An is prettier than Hà Nội. Student 2: Really? I think Hà Nội is prettier …

ƠN

Exercise 5: - Teacher gives students time to practice in pairs about some of the things in the box by using comparative adjectives and the Key Phrases. - Teacher calls some pairs to practice in front of the class and gives feedback.

FI CI A

L

Exercise 4: - Teacher gives students time to read the introduction. - Teacher models pronunciation of star and cinemas, where their bold parts are different.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart the structures. - Make sentences about your family using comparative adjectives. - Prepare for next lesson – Speaking

(Students’ own answer)

* Feedback:......................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1. TOWNS AND CITIES

FI CI A

Asking and saying where places are

L

Lesson 6: Speaking

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask and say where places are. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents Game “GUESSING GAME!” * Given words: Bus station, Police station, School, Hospital, Store ..

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students brainstorm and lead in new lesson v Contents: Students play the game and use language materials simply. Students work in individual v Products: Students’ performance v Organization: - Teacher invites one student to come to in front of the class. He/She has to use phrases or give examples to explain the words that given by teacher. - Teacher invites some students to answer. - Teacher gives a question before beginning the lesson: ? “ You are a tourist in a new town. Where do you look for information and direction?” - Students answer in their own.

` THINK! You are a tourist in a new town. Where do you look for information and directions? (Students’ own answers.)


FI CI A

ƠN

OF

Suggested answers 1. Are we near 2. the bus station 3. any shops 4. five minutes

L

1. Complete the dialogue with the phrases in the box. Then watch or listen and check. Are Chris and the woman from the same town?

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students pay attention to the content of the dialogue v Contents: Students complete the dialogue with the phrases in the box in individual v Products: Students’ word-filling v Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher gives students time to read through the gapped dialogue. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and complete the dialogue. - Teacher plays the video again for students to check their answers. - Teacher checks their answer with the class, then ask the questions to the class and elicit the answers.

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students ask and say where places are as well as develop speaking skill v Contents: Students work in pairs/groups v Products: Students’ performance v Organization While-speaking Exercise 2: - Teacher plays the audio or video again and tell students to listen carefully for the pronunciation and intonation. Teacher could pause after some of the sentences and questions for students to repeat. - Students work in pairs to practise the dialogue.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher reads the study strategy with the class then read through the key phrases. - Teacher asks students to find the key phrases in the dialogue and check their understanding. - Students practice the key phrases in pairs. (With weaker classes, when they close their

2. Watch or listen again. Then practice the dialogue in pairs. (Students’ own answers.) 3. Read the study strategy and follow the instructions. Study strategy Learning the Key Phrases It’s a good idea to practise the Key Phrases, so that you can remember them. • Practise the Key Phrases with a partner. • Close your book and try to write them. How many can you remember? Key phrases Asking and saying where places are A : Excuse me. Are we near the … here? B : Yes, look, we’re here.


A : How far is it / the … from here? B : It’s about … minutes on foot / by bus. A : Thanks for your help. B : You’re welcome. (Students’ own answers.)

Optional activity: - Teacher asks students to close their books and write these gapped sentences on the board. - Students work in pairs to complete the sentences with the correct prepositions. - Teacher checks answers with the class

Optional activity: Language focus Fill in the gaps with suitable prepositions 1.How far is the school….. here? 2. It’s about ten minutes …..foot. 3. Are there any shops….. here? 4. It’s five minutes….. bus. 5. Thanks …..your help. Suggested answers 1.from 2.on 3.around 4.by 5.for

FI CI A

OF

ƠN

4. Work in pairs. Practice the dialogue with How far..? and place from 1 to 4. Example. Student 1: Excuse me, how far is the bus station from here? (What is the distance between here and the bus station?) Student 2: It’s about ten minutes on foot. Student 1: Thanks for your help. Student 2: You’re welcome.

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the example mini dialogue. - Students work in pairs to practice more mini dialogues. (With weaker classes, allow students time to prepare the dialogues before they practise. With stronger classes, students can go straight into the spoken practice.) - Teacher asks some pairs to perform one of their dialogues for the class.

L

books, write some key words on the board to help them remember the phrases. Ex. Excuse, near, far. ) - Teacher sees who managed to remember all the phrases.

5. USE IT – Work in pairs. Look at the situation and prepare a new dialogue. Use the dialogue in exercise 1 to help you.

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the way to ask and say where places are v Contents: Students work in groups to play the game v Products: Students’ conversation v Organization: Post-speaking Exercise 5: - Students work in pairs to prepare a new dialogue. (With stronger classes, you could teach some more phrases for giving directions. Ex. Turn left / right, Go straight on.) - Students swap roles and practice again.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the structures. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

Example: A: How far is it from here to the park? B1: Sorry I don’t know. B2: (must prepare the answer before): It’s about 10 minutes on foot.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1. TOWNS AND CITIES

FI CI A

A description of a town or city

L

Lesson 7: Writing

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write a description of a town or city that they like. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study v Contents: Students observe the pictures/video clip and work in groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization: - Teacher divides class into groups. - Teacher shows series of pictures of places in Ho Chi Minh city (or a video clip). - Students watch it and write down as many places as they can. - Teacher invites some group to show their works. - Teacher leads in the lesson “Today, we’re studying about how to write a description of a town or a city.” ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

Contents


L

FI CI A

OF 1. Read the description of Hồ Chí Minh City. Which word in the THINK! Exercise are in the text? Suggested answers 1. building 2. amusement park 3. shopping mall

NH

Exercise 1: - Students read the description of Hồ Chí Minh City and answer the questions, then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

` THINK! Check the meanings of the words in the box. Which has your town or city got?

ƠN

v Aims: Help students have an idea of writing description of a town or a city v Contents: Students work individual to check the meaning of given words v Products: Students can understand the meaning of given words v Organization: Pre-writing - Teacher asks students to use their dictionaries to check the meanings of the words in the box. - Teacher asks the question to the class and elicit answers from individual students. - Teacher asks more questions about the student’s own town or city, ? “What’s your favourite place? Which parts do you never visit? Why?” - Students answer in their own.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help student how to write a description of a town or city that they like as well as develop writing skill v Contents: Students work in pairs and groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization While-writing Exercise 2: - Students complete the key phrases. Check answers and check that students understand all the phrases. Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to focus on the phrases in blue in the text and elicit which are adjectives. - Students read the sentences and choose the correct words.

2. Complete the Key Phrases with words from the text. Suggested answers 1. south/ Việt Nam 2. 9,000,000 (Nine million) 3. modern/ really friendly 4. many good amusement parks, shopping malls/ buildings 5. sometimes visit Vũng Tàu, Phan Thiết and Đà Lạt, …/ Hồ Chí Minh City is more interesting & Language point: Position of adjectives 3. Look at the phrases in blue in the text. Then underline the correct words.


OF

FI CI A

L

4. Compound sentences. Look at the underlined sentences in the text. Then circle the correct words. Suggested answers 1. similar 2. opposite 3. Hội An Town is an old town, and it’s got a population of about 152,160. 4. Mr Nam sometimes stays in Hà Nội, but he lives in Hồ Chí Minh City.

ƠN

Optional activity: Writing 1.The zoo is really interesting. 2. There are some quite nice shops. 3. There’s a very old castle. 4. The people are really friendly.

NH

- Teacher check answers with the class and check that students understand really, very and quite. Exercise 4: - Teacher gives students two examples of compound sentences, one of which is the combination with “and” and the other with “but”. Make students pay attention to “similar clauses” and “opposite clauses”. - Students work individually to combine the two sentences and volunteer to show them on the board. - Teacher corrects the mistakes if students fail to do any sentences. Optional activity - Teacher asks students to close their books and dictate these sentences to the class. - Teacher checks answers by writing the sentences on the board. Ask students to check their spelling carefully. Point out the double l in really and the silent t in castle. Remind students that they need to pay attention to spelling when they write

5. USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing guide

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate how to write descriptions about a town or a city v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ descriptions v Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher reads the task with the class. - Students answer the questions and plan their description. - Teacher reads through the paragraph structures with the class. - Students write their descriptions. (This can be set for homework. ) - Teacher reminds students to check their grammar and spelling carefully.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

(Students’ own answers)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1. TOWNS AND CITIES

FI CI A

Reading a map

L

Lesson 8: CLIL. Geography

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask and answer questions about maps. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study v Contents: Students work individual to draw picture as requested while others will guess what picture is v Products: Students’ drawing and guessing v Organization: - Teacher invites one student to be a player. Teacher gives him/her a word and he/she has to draw to explain that word. - Teacher invites some students to answer and leads in the lesson. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students understand the idea of a map as well as some symbols used on a map

Contents Game “DRAWING GAME” Suggestion: trees river mountain street train station map,…


QU Y

L FI CI A OF

NH

Exercise 1: - Students work in pairs to check the meanings of the words and match them with the symbols. - Students read the text and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class and make sure that students understand all the words. - Teacher models and drills pronunciation if necessary.

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box and match them with symbols 1–6. Read the text and check your answers.

ƠN

v Contents: Students work individual to match the words with the symbols v Products: v Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their books, then write the word map on the board and elicit the meaning. - Teacher asks students: ? “ What information we can find on maps?” (place, information, direction ,…) ? “When do you use maps, and what kinds of maps do you want to use?” (find place, information ,…/paper, online, …) - Teacher elicits some ideas. - Teacher tells students they are going to practice reading maps in English.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students ask and answer about a map and develop four skills v Contents: Students work in pairs and groups v Products: Students’ performance v Organization Exercise 2: - Students read and listen to the text again. - Teacher elicits what other symbols are mentioned in the text.

Suggested answers 1. river 2. road 3. hill 4. railway 5. forest 6. path

2. Read and listen to the text. What other symbols are on a map? Suggested answers A black circle on a railway is a train station. A red area is a city or town.


Exercise 3: - Students work in pairs to look at map-A and choose the correct words. Check answers with the class.

ƠN

OF

Suggested answers 1. 1:50,000 2. paths 3. hill 4. 156 5. road 6. train station

FI CI A

L

3. Look at map A and choose the correct words.

4. Look at part of the guide map of Bà Nà Hills Mountain Resort and answer the questions.

Exercise 4:

QU Y

NH

- Students look at map B individually and answer the questions, then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate how to read a map v Contents: Students work in groups to draw a map v Products: Students’ map drawing v Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher puts students into pairs to draw their maps. Monitor and help while they are working and encourage them to add a range of features and symbols.

Suggested answers 1. There are 4 cable car stations. 2. Yes, we can. 3. The cable car from Debay station to Morin station. 5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Draw a map of a place you know or an imaginary place. Then take turns asking and answering about your map.


L FI CI A OF PROJECT – DRAW A MAP

QU Y

NH

Optional activity: - For homework, ask students to draw a small section of map or find one online and print it out. Ask them to write a brief description of their map on a separate sheet of paper. Tell them they can use the text in exercise 2 as a model. Tell students not to put their name on the map or the description. - In the next lesson, put students into groups of four and ask them to put their four maps and descriptions together and jumble them up. Then ask them to swap with another group. Students work in their groups to read the descriptions and match them with the maps. Ask each group in turn to present one of the maps to the class and give a description of it. - Teacher asks students to work in groups and draw a map. - Teacher gives students some places that they can draw, for example: school, favorite park, favorite shopping mall, our town, village, … - Teacher gives students deadline.

Optional activity: Speaking

ƠN

- Put pairs together into groups of four to ask and answer about their maps. - Ask some groups to show one of their maps to the class and describe the features on it.

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Draw a map - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 1. TOWNS AND CITIES

L

Lesson 9: Options

FI CI A

Puzzles and games

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all lessons in Unit 1. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game “GUESSING GAME!” v Aims: Help students warm-up and lead in * Given words: London, cruise, map, station, … the new lesson v Contents: Students work individual to play the game v Products: Students’ guessing v Organization: - Teacher invites 1 student to come to in front of the class. He/She has to use phrases or give examples to explain the words that given by teacher. - Teacher invites some students to answer. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students revise some vocabularies related to places in a town or city v Contents: Students work in pairs to complete the puzzle


L FI CI A

OF

Answers 1. Market; 2. Square; 3. Café; 4. Library; 5. Cinema; 6. theatre Mystery word: RESTAURANT

2. GUESS THE SENTENCE. Follow the instructions.

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop skills v Contents: Students work in pairs and groups to do the tasks v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Exercise 2: - Read out the instructions and check that students understand the game. - Invite a confident student to come to the board and write the first letter of each word in their sentence. - Other students guess the sentence. - Students could also play this game in small groups.

1. Complete the puzzle with places in a town. What is the mystery word in grey?

ƠN

v Products: Students can find the mystery word v Organization: Exercise 1: - Students complete the puzzles and find the mystery word. - Students could work in pairs for this, and you could do it as a race to make it fun. - Check answers with the class.

( Students’ own answers.) 3. SPOT THE DIFFERENCE. Work in pairs. Student A looks at map A. Student B looks at map B. Ask and answer questions to find six differences.

DẠ

Y

M

Exercise 3: - Put students into pairs and ask them to decide which of them is Student A and which is Student B. - Refer them to their map and ask them to use a piece of paper to cover their partner’s map. If possible, students should sit back-to-back for this activity so that they can’t see their partner’s map. - Students ask and answer questions to find six differences between their maps. Ask them to make a note of the differences. - Check answers with the class.

Example T– – – –  i–  a  b– –  s– – – – – – –  c – – – – –  i– m–  c – – – (There is a big shopping centre in my city.)

Answers 1. There’s a cinema on map A, but a theatre on map B.


FI CI A

L

2. There’s a train station on map A, but a bus stop on map B. 3. There’s a shopping centre on map A, but a sports centre on map B. 4. There are two restaurants on map A, but only one on map B. 5. There are two cafés on map A, but three on map B. 6. There isn’t a monument in the park on map A, but there is on map B.

NH

ƠN

OF

4. Find the adjectives in the puzzles Exercise 4: - Students unscramble the letters and find the adjectives for describing a place. - Students could work in pairs for this, and you could do it as a race. - Check answers with the class. - As an extension, ask students to write the opposites of the adjectives.

Answers 1. friendly 4. modern (Opposites: 1. unfriendly 4. old

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

2. clean 3. dangerous Exercise 5: 5. ugly 6. expensive - Read out the instructions and check that students understand the game. 2. dirty 3. safe - Students write their comparative forms in 5. pretty 6. cheap) the bingo table. - Choose a confident student to be the game 5. COMPARATIVES BINGO. Work in leader or take on this role yourself. The game groups of four. Follow the instructions. leader calls out the comparative forms in a random order. The first student to hear and tick off all their words is the winner. - Students could also play this game in small groups. - Teacher could repeat the game by brainstorming twelve other adjectives that students know, e.g. good, bad, boring, intelligent, tall, short, new, happy, interesting, nice, fast, slow. - Write the adjectives on the board. - Students choose six adjectives and write the (Students’ own answers.) comparative forms, then play the game again.


ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have learnt v Contents: Students work in groups and write down the opinions v Products: Students’ opinions v Organization: - Teacher asks students to work in groups and discuss what they learned in Unit 1. - Teacher gives students time to discuss in group and write down their opinions. - Teacher calls out some students to present their opinion in front of class. ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 2: DAYS

FI CI A

Daily routines

L

Lesson 1: Vocabulary I./. OBJECTIVES

NH

ƠN

OF

1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson Contents

CHATTING: - T: What did you do before going to school? What the first thing did you do? - Sts: (Students’ own answers in Vietnamese) - T: What did you do next? - Sts: ...... (T writes on the board students’ answer in English) Suggested answers

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Students can know what daily routines are. v Contents: Chatting between teacher and students. v Products: Students find out the meaning of the word “daily routines”. v Organization: - Teacher asks the students about what they did before they came to school. (Ask them what the first thing they did that day was.) Elicit from them that the first thing they did was “get up”. Write this on the board, and ask students what they did next. - Students answer. - When having a few activities on the board, teacher shows students that are “daily routines”. Lead in the new lesson. - Teacher uses the TPS (Think – Pair – Share method) to get the answers from students. ? “What's your favourite day? Why?”

get up

brush teeth

have breakfast ............. ==> Daily routines. ` THINK! What's your favourite day? Why?


- Students answer in their own.

(Students’ own answers) & New words 1. brush one’s teeth (v) (pic.) 2. wash one’s face (v) (pic.) 3. have breakfast / lunch / dinner (v) (pic.) 4. study (v) (expl.) 5. go to school (v) (pic.) 6. have classes (v) (expl.) 7. watch TV (v) (pic.) 8. do one’s homework (v) (pic.) 9. help with the housework (v) (pic.) 10. relax (v) (expl.) 11. get home (v) (expl.) 12. play video games (v) (pic.) 13. chat online (v) (pic.) 14. go to beb (v) (pic.) 15. get up (v) (pic.) 16. sleep (v) (pic.)

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in individual/pairs/groups to complete the tasks. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Exercise 1: - Teacher lets students work in groups of 3 to complete the table with the verbs in blue in the Days and Nights Quiz. - Students work in groups to do the exercise. - Students listen and check the answers.

1. Complete the table with the verbs in blue in the Days and Nights Quiz. Then listen and check. Suggested answers 1. Start / Finish the day: get up, brush my teeth, wash my face, go to bed, sleep 2. Eat: have breakfast / lunch / dinner 3. Travel: go to school, get home 4. Free time: watch TV, relax, play video games, chat online 5. Work and study: study, have classes, do their homework, help with the housework

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Teacher presents new words related to daily routines. v Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. v Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. v Organization: - Teacher shows new words and uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. - Check -up : Matching

DẠ

Y

Exercise 2: - Teacher calls some students to read the Quiz. - Students do the quiz and say whether the sentences are true or false. - Teacher corrects the answers.

Exercise 3:

2. Read the Days and Nights Quiz. Are the sentences True or False? Compare with a partner using the Key Phrases.

Suggested answers: 1. True 2. True 5. False 6. True 9. False 10. True

3. True 7. False 11. False

4. False 8. True 12. False


- Teacher shows examples, then elecit the meaning and usage of the adverbs of frequency.

QU Y

L

FI CI A

NH

- Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

4. Check the meanings of the words in the box. Then watch or listen again and complete the sentences. & Language point ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY Example: a) I always have breakfast. b) I’m never late for school. Usage: To say how often we do things, or how often things happen. - always (adv) luôn luôn every time or all the time - normally / usually (adv) thường thường in the way that most often happens - often (adv) thường many times - sometimes (adv) thỉnh thoảng not always or often - never (adv) không bao giờ not at any time Suggested answers 1. sometimes 2. always 3. often 4. normally 5. never 6. usually

OF

Exercise 4:

3. Watch or listen. Which verbs in exercise 1 do the people mention? Suggested answers 1. Paul: get up, have breakfast 2. Lydia: get up, have breakfast, go to school 3. Michelle: relax, watch TV, go to bed 4. Georgia and Sophie: do their homework, watch TV, play video games, have dinner, chat online

ƠN

- Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and match the people to the phrases. - Students watch/listen and do the task individually. - Teacher checks answers with the class. (With weaker classes, pause after each speaker to check answers and play the video or audio again if students find the task difficult ).

M

- Teacher asks students to listen and complete the sentences.

- Students check the answer on the screen/board.

DẠ

Y

5. Complete the chart with the words in the Exercise 5: box in exercise 4. Then choose the correct - Teacher asks students to complete the chart words in Rules 1–2. with the correct words. (With weaker classes, Suggested answers do this on the board, with the whole class). - Complete the chart: 1. sometimes - Students do the task individually. 2. often 3. normally


L

FI CI A

6. USE IT! Write four true and two false sentences about your routines. Then work in pairs and listen to your partner’s sentences. Say if you think they are true or false.

NH

Exercise 6: - Teacher asks students to write four true and two false sentences about their routines individually. Then work in pairs and listen to their partner’s sentences. Say if they think these sentences true/false. - Students do as directed. - Teacher gives students time to do the task. Then ask some students to tell the class something they learned about their partner.

OF

- Teacher checks answers with the class. Then, elecit the note. - Students listen and coppy down into their notebooks.

ƠN

- Teacher asks students to choose the correct words to complete the rules. - Students do the task.

4. always - Rules: 1. after 2. before * Note: - Adverbs of frequency come after the verb “be”. He is always late. (NOT He always is late.) - In negative sentences, we put “don’t / doesn’t” before the adverb of frequency: I don’t often watch TV. (NOT I often don’t watch TV.) - We use “never” with an affirmative verb: I never watch TV. (NOT I don’t never watch TV.)

(Students’ own answers)

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Students can write the sentences µFinish? Imagine that you are your favourite about their daily routines. celebrity. Write sentences about your daily v Contents: Students work in routines. individual/pairs. v Products: Student’s writing and (Students’ own answers) speaking. v Organization: - Teacher asks students to write their sentences individually. - Students do as required. - Teacher asks them to read their sentences to the class. Then has other students try to guess the celebrities from their routines.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.20). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 2: DAYS

L

Lesson 2: Reading

FI CI A

A busy day

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand the general idea of a text. - develop students’ reading skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Students can predict the content of a text. v Contents: Students work individually. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization: - Teacher reads the questions with the class. Ask individual students to answer and tell the class about their family. Ask more questions to encourage students to say more. - Students answer. - Teacher leads in the new lesson by showing the picture and say: “This is Radfords with sixteen of their children in 2012. Now, we move to Reading lesson - A busy day - to know what daily routines they do everyday”.

Contents ` THINK! Have you got a big family? How many people live in your house? More questions: - Who do you get on well with in your family? - What things do you do with your brother / sister? - Is anyone in your family annoying? Why? ( Students’ own answers )


L

FI CI A

OF - organised (adj) (expl.) - help with the housework (v) (expl.)

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop reading skill. v Contents: Students work individual/ pairs/ groups. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Pre-reading Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the three titles and check that students understand them all. Ask students to look at the photo. Point out to students that for this task they need to understand the general meaning, so they shouldn’t worry if they don’t understand all the details at this point. - Students read the text and choose a title. They can compare their ideas in pairs. - Teacher check answers with the class. While-reading - Teacher has students open their books to page 26.

& New words - son (n) (pic.) - daughter (n) (pic.) - grandchildren (n) (pic.) - brother (n) (pic.) - sister (n) (pic.) - parent (n) (pic.)

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Teacher presents new words related to family. v Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. v Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. v Organization: -Teacher introduces some new words “Before reading, there are some new words in the text.” - Teacher uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. - Check-up: What and where

1. Look at the photo. Choose and write a title a–c for the text. Then read the text and check your idea. Suggested answers c. Happy house 2. Read the Skills Strategy. Then read and listen to the text and choose the correct words. & Skill strategy


L

FI CI A

OF

Optional activity. Suggested answers 1. The children 2. Sue 3. Sue and Noel’s older daughter 4. Sue 5. The young children

3. Use a dictionary to check the meanings of the words in blue in the text. & Vocabulary plus - son (n) con trai - daughter (n) con gái - grandchildren (n) cháu - brother (n) anh/em trai - sister (n) chị/em gái - parent (n) cha, mẹ

NH

Exercise 2: - Teacher reads through the sentences with the class and make sure students understand everything. Point out that for this task students need to read and listen carefully to find specific information. Then, teacher plays the audio. - Students do as directed. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Optional activity - Teacher writes the following questions on the board or dictate them to the class: Who … 1. gets up at 6.45 a.m.? 2. works at home? 3. helps with the housework? 4. doesn’t watch TV a lot? 5. goes to bed at 7 p.m.? - Students work in pairs to answer the questions from memory then scan the text quickly to find out the answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers 1. doesn’t have breakfast 2. don’t help 3. at home 4. always

ƠN

- Teacher asks students to read the Skills strategy before doing exercise.

M

QU Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher has students use a dictionary to check the meanings of the words in blue in the text. Discuss the meanings with the class. Teacher could ask students to translate the words into their own language to check understanding.

DẠ

Y

Optional activity - On the board draw two columns, with a stick figure of a man at the top of one, and a stick figure of a woman at the top of the other. Teacher asks students to write the blue words in the correct columns and add more words to each. - Students do as directed. - Teacher checks answers with the class and bring students’ ideas together on the board.

Optional activity Suggested answers Man

Woman

son, brother (father, uncle, grandfather, grandson)

daughter, sister, granddaughter (mother, grandmother, aunt) 4. USE IT! Work in groups. Talk about the Radfords and your daily routines. What are the differences? The Radfords

My family


∑ My father …..

FI CI A

L

‡ There are some differences between my family and the Radfords routines: First, ……………. Second, …………. Finally, ………… ( Students’ own answers )

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.22). - Prepare new lesson.

∑ Noel gets up at 4.45 a.m

OF

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in groups. v Products: Students’ comprehension. v Organization: Post-reading Exercise 4: - Teacher lets students work in group of 4. - Students discuss and write activities in a poster. - Teacher gives students enough time for their presentation in front of the class. - Students reports their posters.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Lesson 3: Language focus

FI CI A

• Present simple: affirmative and negative

L

UNIT 2: DAYS

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about facts and routines using the present simple. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Game: Matching ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Teacher elicits the present simple tense from the game. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ right matching. v Organization: - Teacher cuts out and laminates the 24 game cards. Teacher calls out some volunteer students go to the board and play the game. Divide the cards between the players. Choose a student to lay the first card. The student who has the picture to match the sentence on the laid card places their card next to the previous card (like dominoes). The winner is the first person to use all their cards. (This game can be played with 2-6 players). - Students play the game. - Teacher leads in the new lesson by Example: underlining the verbs and explains that they

Contents


FI CI A

& Grammar THE SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE Usage - We use the present simple to talk about: ¸something that is true in the present: + I'm nineteen years old. + I'm a student. + He lives in London. + The earth goes around the sun. ¸something that happens regularly in the present: + I play football every weekend. + He works in a big bank. + Mary gets up at 6 every morning. + The children don't go to school on Sundays. ¸ Use the simple present with: + Every day/ every morning/... + Day after day/... Form ‡ Affirmative form: (+) S + Verb / Verb -s/-es Ex: They live in Ha Noi. She lives in Ha Noi. ‡ Negative form: (-) S + don't / doesn't + Verb-bare Ex: They don't live in Ha Noi. She doesn't live in Ha Noi. Spelling rules The verbs for he, she and it end differently: - We add -s to most verbs. - We add -es when a verb ends with: -o, -ch, -s, sh, -x or -z. - We remove -y and add -ies when a verb ends with a consonant + y. - We use has instead of have.

- Teacher explains the usage and affirmative/negative forms of the simple present tense.

QU Y

NH

- Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students know grammar: The simple present tense. v Contents: Students work individually. v Products: The present simple tense. v Organization:

She watches TV after school. We come home at three o’clock.

L

are in the present simple tense. Tell students they are going to study this.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students apply the grammar they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in individual/pairs/groups. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the sentences and highlight the different forms for I and he / she. - Students match the sentences with the spelling rules. - Teacher checks answers with the class, and checks that students understand all the rules. Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to choose the correct

1. Compare the sentences. Then match a–d with Spelling Rules 1–4. Suggested answers 1. d 2. c 3. a 4. b 2. Choose the correct verbs.


Suggested answers 1. go 2. relax 3. speaks 4. finishes 5. have 6. studies

Exercise 3: - Teacher explains how to pronounce third person -s. Model pronunciation of the sound.

& Pronunciation: Third person -s 3. Listen to the third person form of the verbs and repeat. Which verbs end with an /ɪz/ sound? * Note + /s/: -p, -k, -t, -f Ex: Stops /stop/ Laughs /læfs/ + /iz/: /s/, /z/, /ʃ/, /tʃ/, /ʒ/, /dʒ/. Ex: Watches / wɑːtʃiz/ Washes /wɑːʃiz/ + /z/: /b/, /d/, /g/, /v/, /ð/, /m/, /n/, /ŋ, /l/, /r/,... Ex: Plays /pleɪz/ Bags /bægz/ Suggested answers 1. c 2. c 3. a 4. c 5. d

M

Exercise 4: - Teacher has students complete the examples then compare their answers in pairs. - Students do as required. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Y

- Teacher asks students to elicit the rules from this task, then choose the correct words to complete the rules. - Students do the task individually. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 5: - Teacher reads through the information in the table with the class. Use the pictures to make sure students understand everything.

DẠ

FI CI A

OF

NH

QU Y

- Teacher has students listen to the third person form of the verbs and asks which verbs ends with an /iz/ sound. - Teacher asks students repeat the verbs. - Teacher corrects the mistakes.

ƠN

- Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

L

verbs then compare their answers in pairs. - Students do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

4. Complete the examples from the text on page 26. Then choose the correct words in Rules 1–3. Suggested answers Complete the examples 1. don’t help 2. doesn’t watch 3. don’t; go Rules 1. doesn’t 2. don’t 3. never 5. Look at the information in the table. Write affirmative and negative sentences about the people.


L

FI CI A

µFinish? Write five true sentences about your partner. (Students’ own answers)

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the grammar. v Contents: Students work in individual/pairs. v Products: Students’ sentences. v Organization: - Teacher refers fast finishers to the Finished? activity. - Students can write their sentences individually and compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks them to read their sentences to the class, adding in one false sentence about their partner. See if the class can guess which sentence is false.

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. What does each person in your family do at home? Tell your partner. Use some of the verbs from pages 24– 25 and exercise 5 (page 25) with adverbs of frequency. (Students’ own answers)

OF

Exercise 6: - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers individually, then put them into pairs to discuss what happens in their home. - Students do the task. - Teacher asks some students to report back on their partner’s family.

Suggested answers 1. Tom and Mina wash the dishes. Vicky doesn’t wash the car. 2. Tom and Vicky sit on the sofa a lot. Mina doesn’t sit on the sofa a lot. 3. Tom and Vicky don’t make breakfast. Mina makes breakfast. 4. Tom and Mina don’t watch TV a lot. Vicky watches TV a lot.

ƠN

Ask students write sentences individually then compare in pairs. - Students do the task as directed. - Teacher checks the answers.

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.19). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 2. DAYS

FI CI A

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening

L

Week : Period:

• Special days

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand the main ideas in an interview about a celebration. - develop students’ listening skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents Game: Memorizing ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Introduce to students about some name in English of special days. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: The list of some special days. v Organization: - Teacher asks students to watch the video clip carefully. And then, use their memory to list the name of them in a piece of paper. The winner is the one who list the most correctly names. - Students play the game as directed in a minute. - Time out, teacher checks and declares the (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0a15UOja3JM) winner. Then, lead in the new lesson. Teacher uses TPS (Think – Pair – Share) method to ask students answer the questions: ` THINK! What are the most important celebrations in your country? (Students’ own answer)


L

OF

FI CI A

& New words - celebrate (v) (expl.) - dance (v) (expl.) - costume (n) (pic.) - present (n) = gift (n) (pic.) - special (adj) - firework (n) ( - meal (n) (pic.) - lion (n) (pic.) -e

ƠN

1. Complete the questionnaire with the words in the box. Suggested answers 1. sing, play, dance 2. wear, make 3. give 4. go out 5. visit, invite 6. have 2. Read the Study Strategy. Then look at exercise 3. What is the radio programme about? What topics or words do you need to listen for? & Skill strategy

M

QU Y

NH

? What are the most important celebrations in your country? When is this celebration? Do you like it? Why? ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Teacher presents new words related to special days. v Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. v Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. v Organization: Pre-listening - Teacher shows new words and uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to complete the questionnaire. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this). - Students do the task in individual/pairs. - Check answers with the class. Exercise 2: - Teacher reads the study strategy with the class then ask students to look at exercise 3. Put them into pairs or small groups to brainstorm topics or words they need to listen for. - Students listen carefully, then do as required. - Teacher checks the answers.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. v Contents: Students work in pairs/groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization While-listening

(Students’ own answer) 3. Read the introduction to the radio programme. Then listen. In what order do they mention the objects in the photos? Suggested answers


L

4. A

FI CI A

3. C

OF

4. Listen again and write True or False. Suggested answers 1. True 2. False (People clean their houses before Lunar New Year) 3. False (People often eat vegetarian food at Lunar New Year) 4. True 5. False (The lion stops at all the restaurants)

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads through the sentences with the class. Point out that for this task students need to read and listen carefully for specific information. They shouldn’t use prior information. (With stronger classes, teacher could ask students to correct the false sentences). - Students do the task, they can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

1. D 2. B

ƠN

Exercise 3: - Teacher allows students time to read the introduction. Focus on the photos and elicit what they show. Play the audio. - Students listen and order the objects. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Optional activity 1. Money 2. The day before Lunar New Year 3. No, she thinks they’re dangerous.

M

QU Y

Optional activity - Teacher dictates these questions to the class: 1. What kind of present does the speaker prefer? 2. When is the big meal with the family? 3. Does Zoe like fireworks? Why / Why not? - Students discuss the answers to the questions from memory. - Teacher plays the audio again for them to check their answers.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ talking. v Organization: Post-listening Exercise 5: - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers individually.

5. USE IT! Work in groups. Ask and answer the questions in the Happy Days!


(Students’ own answer )

L

questionnaire in exercise 1. Use adverbs of frequency in your answers.

FI CI A

- Students then ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Teacher monitors while they are working and note down any errors with frequency adverbs to correct at the end. ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.23). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 2. DAYS

FI CI A

• Present simple: questions • Simple sentence

L

Lesson 5: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer questions about routines and free time. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents Game: Make me say “Yes, I do” ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students identify the question form of the simple present tense. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: Students’ comparison v Organization: - Teacher guides students to play the game. - Students play game in pairs. Student A asks student B “Do you…?” questions and A will get one point for each positive answer, but no points for “No, I don’t” from B. The winner is the one who get the most points. Example: - Teacher may allow questions with the Present Simple of “to be” and get students to - Student A: Do you like milkshake? ask about their partners’ family members...to - Student B: No, I don’t. (0 point) - Student A: Do you eat every day? bring in 3rd person S. - Student B: Yes, I do. (+1 point) - Teacher elecits the question form of the simple present tense from the game. & Grammar


L

PRESENT SIMPLE: QUESTIONS 1. Yes - no questions a. To be: Am/ Is/ Are + S + O ? Short answer: Yes, S + am/ is / are. No, S + am/ is /are + not. Ex: Are you a student? Yes, I am. / no, I’m not. b. Ordinary verbs:

FI CI A

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students understand how to use simple present tense in questions. v Contents: Students pay attention to the grammar and work individual. v Products: The present simple: Questions. v Organization: - Teacher explains the grammar to students.

Short answer: Yes, S + do/ does. No, S + do/ does + not. Ex: Do you like this celebration? Yes, I do. / No, I don’t

OF

- Students copy down to their notebooks.

Do / Does + S + V + O?

ƠN

2. Wh-questions a. To be: Wh-word + am/ is/ are + S? Ex: Where are you from? Who is he? b. Ordinary Verbs:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students apply the knowledge Wh- word + do / does + S + Vinf + O? they have learnt to do the tasks given. Ex: Where do you come from? v Contents: Students work in What does she do? individual/pairs/groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization: 1. Match questions 1–5 with answers a–e. Exercise 1: Then choose the correct words in Rules 1–4 - Teacher has students match the questions Suggested answers with the answers. Match questions with answers: - Students work in individual to match, they 1. b compare their answers in pairs. 2. c - Teacher checks answers with the class, then 3. e ask students to read the rules and choose the 4. d correct words to complete them. 5. a (With weaker classes, do this exercise with Rules: the whole class. Check answers with the 1. do and does class) 2. don’t add 3. beginning 4. do * Note: - We use do / does to ask questions in the present simple: Do you like fireworks?


QU Y

FI CI A

OF

NH

Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to look at ex.2 to complete the key phrases. - Students do the task individually. - Teacher checks the answers with class. - Teacher explains the time expressions to students. Add more possible time phrases (in January, in the morning, at midday, at night) - Students copy down to their notebooks.

3. Look at exercise 2. Complete the Key Phrases. Add more words to the list.

ƠN

Exercise 2: - Students read the sentences and choose the correct words. They can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

2. Choose the correct words. Suggested answers 1. Do 2. do 3. Does 4. have 5. does

L

NOT You like fireworks? - We don’t add -s with he / she / it forms: Who does she invite? NOT Who does she invites?

4. Work in pairs. Have a question competition. Write questions with words from the grid. How many questions can you make in five minutes? (Students’ own answer)

Y

M

Exercise 4: - Teacher focus on the grid and make sure students understand “Where, When and How” often. Elicit a few example questions from the class, (e.g. How often do you help at home?) Put students into pairs and give them five minutes to write their questions. - Students do the task as required. - Teacher asks some pairs to read their questions to the class. Correct any errors, and see which pair wrote the most correct questions.

Suggested answers 1. in 2. at 3. on 4. at

DẠ

Exercise 5: - Teacher gives the definition of a simple sentence.

5. Choose the correct word. & Simple sentence: A simple sentence consists of one independent clause(s). Suggested answers


L

FI CI A

OF

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Complete questions 1–7 with time expressions from the Key Phrases. Ask and answer the questions. (Students’ own answer)

µ Finish? Write six questions for an interview with your favourite celebrity. Then act out your interview with a partner. (Students’ own answer)

NH

Exercise 6: - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the example question and answer. - Students work in pairs to complete the questions. - Teacher asks some students to read their questions to the class. Correct any errors. - Students ask and answer their questions in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class something they learned about their partner.

Choose the correct word: - one Choose and tick (✓) the simple sentences. 1. √ 2. _ 3. _ 4. √ 5. _

ƠN

- Students listen then copy down into their notebooks. - Teacher asks students to do the task individually. - Students do as required. - Teacher checks the answers with class.

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the way the use comparative adjectives to compare things. v Contents: Students work individual/pairs v Products: Students’ comparison v Organization: - Teacher refer fast finishers to the Finished? activity. - Students can write their questions individually then act out an interview with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher ask fast finishers to hand their questions to a classmate. Their classmate reads out the questions and the fast finisher role-plays the part of their celebrity. See if other students can guess the celebrity from the interview.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.21). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 2. DAYS

FI CI A

• Making plans and suggestions

L

Lesson 6: Speaking

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - practise making plans and suggestions. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students get comfortable with classmates and focus their brains on content of the new lesson. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: Students’ talking. v Organization: - Teacher asks students to watch a video clip. Then read the question with the class and ask students to note down three things they do with their friends at the weekend. Put students into small groups to ask and answer (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UKvEQfqFrqg) the question and find out who has similar answers. Ask some students to tell the class ` THINK! What do you usually do with your what they do and who in their group does friends at the weekend. similar things. (Students’ own answers) - Students do as directed. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE 1. Look at the programme for Special days at FORMATION Highfield School. Check any new words.


OF

FI CI A

L

Which activities interest you? Which don’t interest you? & New words - competition (n) (expl.) => dance competition (n) => costume competition (n) - culture (n) (expl.)

ƠN

(Students’ own answers)

2. Watch or listen and complete the dialogue. What do Daisy and Gareth decide to do? Suggested answers 1. cooking class 2. concert 3. disco 4. dance competition 5. disco They decide to go to the dance competition and the concert, and the disco in the evening

QU Y

NH

v Aims: Help students pay attention to the content of the dialogue v Contents: Students work in individual/ pairs. v Products: Students’ understanding. v Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher allows students time to read the programme. Students can use their dictionaries to check the meanings of new words. (With weaker classes, read the programme with the class and explain any new words). - Students read and check the meanings of new words in pairs. - Teacher asks individual students which activities interest them and which don’t interest them. Exercise 2: - Teacher allows students time to read through the gapped dialogue. Play the video or audio for students to watch or listen and complete the dialogue. - Students do the task individually. - Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to check their answers. Check answers with the class, then ask the question to the class and elicit the answer about what Daisy and Gareth decide to do.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students develop speaking skill. v Contents: Students work in pairs/groups v Products: Students’ performance v Organization While-speaking Exercise 3: 3. Watch or listen again. Then practise the - Teacher plays the audio or video again. Tell dialogue students to listen carefully for the (Students’ own answers) pronunciation and intonation. - Students work in pairs to practise the dialogue.


L FI CI A

OF

(Students’ own answers)

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Look at the cinema programme. Prepare and practise a new dialogue. Use the dialogue in exercise 2 and the Key Phrases. (Students’ own answers)

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the way to make plans and suggestions v Contents: Students work in groups. v Products: Students’ conversation. v Organization: Post-speaking Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students work in pairs to prepare a new dialogue. - Students swap roles and practise again. - Teacher asks some students to perform their dialogues for the class. Optional activity: - With stronger classes, students could work in pairs and make a poster for a special day at their school. - Teacher monitor and help while they are working. They could swap posters with another pair and practise a new dialogue using the poster they have been given. Ask some pairs to perform their dialogues for the class.

4. Study the Key Phrases. Then complete the mini-dialogue. Use some of the ideas from the Family Fun Day programme in exercise 1.

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads through the key phrases with the class. Ask students to find the key phrases in the dialogue, and check they understand everything. Remind students that they should try to learn key phrases. - Students complete the mini-dialogue. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs to complete this activity).

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the structures. - Do exercises (in workbook p.37). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

UNIT 2. DAYS

L

Week : Period:

Lesson 7: Writing • A special day

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write a description of a celebration or special day. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study. v Contents: Students observe the pictures/video clip and work in groups v Products: Students’ answers v Organization: - Teacher asks students to watch a video clip. And show students that is “Notting Hill Carnival” - Students pay attention to the video clip. - Then, teacher asks the question to the class and elicit answers from individual students. Ask more questions to encourage students to speak more, (e.g. Why do you like this special day? Who do you celebrate with? What do you do?)

(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zOl-PDc75ME) ` THINK! What is your favourite special day or celebration? (Students’ own answers)


ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box. Then describe the photo using the words & New words - celebration (n) (expl.) - parade (n) (pic.) - costume (n) (ex.)

NH

- Students work in individually. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students have an idea of writing description of a celebration or special day. v Contents: Students work individual to check the meaning of given words. v Products: Students can understand the meaning of given words. v Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: - Students check the meanings of the words in their dictionaries. - Teacher model pronunciation of the words, if necessary. - Students work in pairs to describe the photo using the words. - Teacher elicits sentences describing the photo from individual students and, as a class, build up a description of the photo.

2. Read the description. Where and when is the carnival? What do people do? Suggested answers - The carnival is in Notting Hill, London in August. - People wear costumes, play music and dance. 3. Look at the text and complete the Key Phrases.

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help student how to write a description of a celebration or special day as well as develop their writing skill. v Contents: Students work in pairs and groups. v Products: Students’ answers. v Organization While-writing Exercise 2: - Teacher checks that students understand Caribbean and carnival. - Students read the description and answer the questions. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

(Students’ own answers)

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Students look at the text and complete the key phrases. - Teacher checks answers and check that students understand all the key phrases.

Suggested answers 1. the Notting Hill Carnival 2. Caribbean culture 3. big parades 4. fun


4. Look at the words in blue in the text. How do you say also in your language? Then choose the correct words. & Language point - “Also” is used in positive sentences, to show agreement or something in common. - “Also” comes before a single action verb. Except… “Also” comes after a modal or “to be” verb, and before the infinitive.

- Students choose the correct position for also in the sentences then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers 1. We also have 2. There’s also 3. I also like 4. is also

FI CI A

OF

ƠN

Optional activity 1. I love the costumes and I also enjoy the music. 2. The carnival is colourful and it’s also fun. 3. People sing in the streets and they also dance. 4. At the end of the day I’m very happy and I’m also tired.

QU Y

NH

Optional activity - With books closed, teacher dictates these sentences to the class: 1. I love the costumes and I enjoy the music. 2. The carnival is colourful and it’s fun. 3. People sing in the streets and they dance. 4. At the end of the day I’m very happy and I’m tired. - Teacher asks students to rewrite the sentences adding “also” to each one. - Students work in pairs for this. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

L

Exercise 4: - Teacher focuses on the word in blue in the text and elicit how students say it in their language. - Students answers. - Teacher explains how to use “also” in English. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

5. USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing guide.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate how to write descriptions about a celebration or special day. v Contents: Students work in groups v Products: Students’ descriptions v Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher reads the task with the class. - Students answer the questions and plan their description. - Teacher reads through the paragraph structure with the class. - Students write their descriptions. This can be set for homework.

(Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

- Teacher remind students to check their grammar and spelling carefully. ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook p.23). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 8: CLIL • Geography: Time zones

L

UNIT 2. DAYS

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - talk about time zones. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study. v Contents: Students work individual. v Products: Students’ answers. v Organization: - With books closed, teacher asks: ? “What time is it now”? - Students answers. - Teacher elicits the answer, then ask: ? “What time is it in New York?/London?/Brisbane?” - If students have smartphones with them, they can find the times on their phones. If not, teacher tells students they should know the answers by the end of the lesson. Write time zones on the board and explain that different parts of the world are in different

Contents TIME ZONES


time zones. Tell students they are going to learn about these now.

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box. Read the text and match the words to numbers 1–7 on the map. & New words - longitude (n) (object) - Prime Meridian (n) (object) - Greenwich Mean Time = GMT (n) (expl.) (Greenwich Mean Time was originally developed as a tool for British mariners. It was officially adopted as the legal time throughout Great Britain in 1880, and adopted as an international standard in 1884. It has now been replaced as the official international time standard by Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated to UTC, but it is still commonly referred to.) - east (n) (object) - west (n) (object) - north (n) (object) - south (n) (object)

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Help students understand the meaning of new words. v Contents: Students work in pairs to match the words with numbers. v Products: Students’ understanding. v Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher uses a globe to teach new words. Explain the word “Greenwich Mean Time” clearly for students, give more information of this word. - Students listen carefully then copy down in their notebooks. - Teacher asks students read the text and match the words to the numbers on the map. - Students do the task in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class and make sure that students understand all the words. Model and drill pronunciation, if necessary, especially of “Greenwich /grenɪʧ/”.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students know more about time zones. v Contents: Students work in individual/ groups. v Products: Students’ answers. v Organization Exercise 2: - Students read and listen to the text again and decide if the sentences are true or false. - Teacher points out that they need to correct the false sentences. They can compare their

Suggested answers 1. Prime Meridian 2. Greenwich Mean Time 3. north 4. west 5. east 6. south 7. longitude

2. Read and listen to the text and write True or False. Correct the false sentences. Suggested answers 1. False (They go from north to south.) 2. False (The Prime Meridian is the line at 0° longitude.) 3. True 4. False (The time in places east of the Prime Meridian is ahead of GMT.)


OF

FI CI A

L

3. Look at the clocks and answer the questions. Suggested answers 1. England, the USA, Spain, Brazil, Australia, Việt Nam. 2. It’s behind. 3. It’s seven hours ahead. 4. It’s three hours behind. 5. It’s 10 p.m. 6. No, because it’s 2 a.m

ƠN

Optional activity 1. The Earth rotates 15° longitude every hour. 2. The Earth has 24 time zones. 3. Rio is 45° west of the Prime Meridian. 4. Istanbul is 30° east of the Prime Meridian.

NH

answers in pairs. Check answers with the class. Exercise 3: - Students work in pairs to look at the clocks and answer the questions. - Teacher checks answers with the class. If students didn’t use their phones to answer the questions in the Warm-up, ask them again now what time it is in New York, London and Hà Nội. Optional activity: - Teacher writes these numbers on the board. 1. 15 2. 24 3. 45 4. 30 - Then, teacher asks students to scan the text quickly and write a sentence explaining the meaning of each number. - Students do the task in groups. - Teacher checks the answers.

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Complete the table. Then ask and answer questions about the time in the different cities. Suggested answers Tokyo: 10 p.m. Mexico City: –7 Sydney: +10 Rio: 10 a.m. Hà Nội: 8 p.m.

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate about the time in the different cities. v Contents: Students work in groups. v Products: Students’ conversation. v Organization: Exercise 4: - Students work in pairs to complete the table. - Teacher check answers with the class, then ask two confident students to read out the example dialogue. - Students ask and answer questions. Once students have asked questions using the times in the table, they can take turns to choose a different time for London, so their partner has to work out the time in one of the other cities.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Draw a map - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

(Students’ own answers)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 2. DAYS

L

Lesson 9: Options

FI CI A

Puzzles and games

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all lessons in Unit 2. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents 1. Look at the code and write the sentences.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Help students warm-up and lead in the new lesson v Contents: Students work individual to play the game. v Products: Students’ sentences. v Organization: - Teacher demonstrates how the puzzle works using the example answer. Students could work in pairs for this, and teacher could do it as a race to make it fun. - Teacher checks answers with the class. As an extension, students could work in pairs and write the code for another phrase for daily routines from pages 22 and 23. They could then swap with another pair and solve the puzzle they are given. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

Suggested answers 1. I get up at six. 2. I sometimes go to school on foot. 3. My mum doesn’t watch TV


L

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

2. SENTENCE NOUGHTS AND CROSSES. Work in pairs. one of you is a nought (0) and the other is a cross (X). Take turns saying sentences about your partner. Use the present simple affirmative or negative. If your sentence is true, write a 0 or a X in the table.

NH

v Aims: Help students revise the present simple affirmative or negative. v Contents: Students work in pairs to play the game. v Products: Students’ speaking. v Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher reads out the instructions and check that students understand the game. With weaker classes, brainstorm some sentences that students could use in the game, (e.g. You sometimes watch TV. You never play football.) Point out that they must try to think of sentences that are true for their partner. - Students play the game. Students could repeat the game with a new partner for extra practice. - This time, teacher could specify that all the sentences must be negative, or instead of sentences, students must ask questions which elicit the answer ‘yes’.

3. THE LONGEST SENTENCE. Work in two teams. Each student says a word to make a team sentence. Use the adverbs of frequency in the box. Which team can make the longest sentence?

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have revised to do the tasks given as well as develop skills. v Contents: Students work in pairs/teams. v Products: Students’ answers v Organization Exercise 3: - Teacher divides the class into two teams. Explain that each student in turn must say one word, and the idea is to keep the sentence going to make it as long as possible. Elicit some words for making a sentence longer, (e.g. and, but, also). - Teams take turns making their longest sentence. The other team can listen and count the words in the sentence. Students could also play this game in small groups. - Teacher sees which group manages to make the longest sentence. Exercise 4:

(Students’ own answers)

(Students’ own answers)


L

FI CI A

OF 5. TRUE OR FALSE GAME. Work in pairs. Take turns asking and answering questions. Follow the instructions.

(Students’ own answers)

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION v Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have learnt. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: Students’ speaking. v Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher read out the instructions and check that students understand the game. - Students write their questions. - With stronger classes, students could use their own ideas, as well as the ideas in the box. - With weaker classes, teacher puts students into pairs to write their questions, then put them into different pairs to ask and answer. Students work in pairs to ask and answer their questions and guess the false answers. Students could swap roles and play the game again. - Teacher sees who managed to guess the false answers

4. Find eight verbs about celebrations in the grid. Each verb is in a different colour. Then match the verbs to pictures 1–8. Suggested answers 1. wear crazy clothes 2. give presents 3. have a special meal 4. dance 5. visit family 6. play music 7. celebrate 8. make costumes

ƠN

- Teacher reads out the instructions and look at the example. Point out that the circled letters make up the example. - Students work in pairs to find the verbs and match them to the pictures. - With weaker classes, teacher could allow students to refer back to page 26 to help them. - With stronger classes, teacher could specify that students mustn’t look back, and teacher could do it as a race. - Teacher checks answers with the class

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

I./. OBJECTIVES

FI CI A

Lesson 1: Vocabulary Animals

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

NH

ƠN

OF

1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - get some more knowledge about animals. - develop students’ speaking and listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Students can talk about animals ❖ Contents: Students apply their knowledge to the situations, then work in pairs to answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students call out the name as many animals as they can ❖ Organization: -Teacher puts students into pairs and set a time limit of two or three minutes for them to name as many animals as they can. -Teacher brings students’ ideas together on the board and check that they understand all the animal words. See which pair named the most animals correctly. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to animals.

THINK! How many animals can you name in thirty seconds? Game: NAME ANIMALS  New words


-camel (n)

-bat (n)

-crocodile (n)

OF

-butterfly (n)

L

-frog (n)

FI CI A

-wolf (n)

- Check -up : Matching

-giraffe (n)

QU Y

NH

ƠN

-eagle (n)

-gorilla (n)

-octopus (n)

-ostrich (n)

-scorpion (n)

1. Look at the photos and watch or listen to three conversations. Which animal is correct for each conversation?

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in individual/pairs/groups to complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to focus on the photos and check that students know what the animals are. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and decide which animal is correct for each conversation. - Teacher check answers with the class.

DẠ

-

v Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. ❖ Organization: - Teacher shows a poster of animals and uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach new words, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks.

Suggested answers 1. a fish ; 2. a wolf ; 3. a camel


FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers 1. it is; 2. I’ve got; 4. a dog; 5. an elephant .

3. a frog;

 PRONUNCIATION: sentence stress 3. Look at the questions and sentences. Listen and repeat. Underline the stressed words. Suggested answers 1. What do you think it is? 2. It looks like a camel. 3.It sounds like a cat. 4. Is it a dog? 5. Maybe it's a giraffe.

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 3: - Teacher gives students enough time to read through the questions and sentences. - Teacher checks they understand what sentence stress is. Demonstrate sentence stress in the students’ own language, if necessary. - Teacher plays the audio, pausing after each question or sentence for students to repeat. Play the audio again for students to underline the stressed words. - Teacher checks answers with the class - Students listen to the audio and follow the teacher’s guide

2. Watch or listen again and complete the Key Phrases.

ƠN

Exercise 2: - Teacher allows students time to read through the gapped key phrases. Then plays the video or audio again for students to complete the phrases. - Teacher checks answers with the class, and check that students understand all the phrases. ( With stronger classes, students could complete the key phrases from memory, then watch or listen again to check.) - Students listen to the audio and complete the Key Phrases

L

(With weaker classes, pause after each conversation to check answers and play the video or audio again if students find the task difficult.) - Students listen to the audio and choose the matching pairs

DẠ

Y

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads through the animal names in the box with the class and check that students understand them all. Teacher could ask students to check the meanings in their dictionaries, or explain the meanings. - Teacher models pronunciation of the words. Read out the quiz title Creature close-ups and point to the photos. Explain

4. Play the Creature close-ups game. Follow the instructions. Then listen and check Suggested answers 1. frog 2. elephant 4. snake 5. gorilla 7. rabbit 8. whale 10. ostrich 11. bat

3. butterfly 6. eagle 9. crocodile


OF

FI CI A

L

that creature is another word for animal, and explain the meaning of close-up. - Teacher put students into teams and give them a few minutes to look at the animals in their teams and decide which ones they can guess. Ask teams in turn to choose a photo and say what they think it is. If they are correct, they get a point. If not, do not give the answer away, but turn to the next team and ask them to choose an animal to identify. Continue until all the animals have been guessed. See how many points each team has. - Students guess the photos in turn

5. Listen and identify the animal sounds. Compare your ideas with a partner's. Use the Key Phrases.

Optional activity: -Teacher asks students to choose three animals from exercise 4 and write them as jumbled words. Ex. awehl (whale). When they have finished, ask them to close their books and swap words with a partner. They try to unscramble the words they have been given. Students could repeat with a different partner for more practice -Students follow to the teacher’s guide

Optional activity: Vocabulary Example. awehl (whale).

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

Exercise 5: -Teacher plays the audio for students to identify the animal sounds. Play the audio again, pausing after each sound. Put students into pairs to compare their ideas. Ask them to use the key phrases. Check answers with the class -Students listen and try to guess the animal sounds

DẠ

Y

Exercise 6: -Teacher reads through the questions with the class and elicit or explain the meanings of the words in blue. Ask two confident students to read out the questions and answers, and ask other students to guess the animal. (With weaker classes, use the

Suggested answers : 1. camel 2. whale 4. eagle 5. frog

3. monkey 6. bat


NH

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all the new words. -Prepare for next lesson

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

questions to remind students how to form 6.Look at the questions and check the questions in the present simple) meanings of the words in blue. What do you -Students work in pairs to ask and answer the think the animal is? question, then present in front of the class Suggested answers : a crocodile ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can write the sentences about their places in town or city. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. 7.USE IT! Work in pairs. Play a guessing ❖ Products: Student’s opinions game. Think of an animal in exercise 4. Ask ❖ Organization: questions to identify your partner’s animal. - Read out the instructions and check that students understand them. Students look at the example question and answer. Demonstrate if necessary by thinking of an animal yourself and getting students  Finish! Look at the animals in exercise 4. to ask you questions to guess what it is. Which animals live in water, on land or both? Students play the guessing game in pairs. See who guessed correctly. ( Students’ own answers)

DẠ

Y

M

* Feedback: ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................... ............................. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 2: Reading The ugliest animals ?

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - know how to answer specific questions about the text. - find out more about the blobfish. - use vocabulary items related to the issue of passage. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Students can predict the content of  THINK! Look at the animals in the box. a text from photo. Which animals do you think are ugly? ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ opinions ❖ Organization: eagle gorilla frog - Teacher reads the question with the class and check that students understand ugly. Put students into pairs to discuss which animals in the box are ugly. Teacher could ask them to list the animals in order, from spider bat crocodile ugly to not ugly. Ask pairs to report back to (Students’ own answers.) the class, and ask other students to say if they agree or disagree. Encourage as many students as possible to join in and express their opinions - Students work in pairs and give opinions


FI CI A

L

the ugliest animal in the world

OF

1+3. Check the meanings of the words in blue in sentences 1–3. Then read the text. Which sentences does the writer agree with?  New words

-blobfish (n): cá giọt nước -protect (v): to make sure that somebody or something is not harmed, injured, damaged, etc. -species (n) a group into which animals, plants, etc. -become extinct: bị tuyệt chủng -in danger : gặp nguy hiểm -help (v) : giúp đỡ (n): sự giúp đỡ -ugly (adj) >< beautiful (adj) -common (adj) : chung -colourful (adj): full of bright colours or having a lot of different colours -rare (adj) : hiếm, hiếm có

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to the blobfish. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. ❖ Organization: Pre-reading -Teacher asks students to read the three sentences and check the meanings of the words in blue. -Teacher introduces some new words, uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. - Check-up: Rub out and remember

➔ To day we will learn about the blobfish -

ƠN

- Teacher shows the picture of blobfish and leads in the lesson: “To day we will learn about the blobfish the ugliest animal in the world.”

DẠ

Y

M

Exercise 1: -Teacher reads out the sentences and check that students understand everything. Read out the question and point out to students that for this task they need to think about the writer’s point of view. ? “ Read the text quickly and tell me which sentences does the writer agree with?” -Students read the text and answer the Suggested answer question. They can compare their ideas in The writer agrees with sentences 1 and 3 pairs. -Teacher checks answers with the class, encouraging students to point to sentences in the text which confirm the answer.

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE


L FI CI A

OF

Suggested answer 1.True 2 .False (It lives 1,000 metres under the sea.) 3 .True 4 .False (We often see information.)

Optional activity: Vocabulary plus

NH

Optional activity: Vocabulary plus -Teacher asks students to make pairs of opposites with the adjectives in blue -Students work in pairs to do the teacher’s task. -Teacher checks answers with the class.

2. Read and listen to the text and write True or False.

ƠN

v Aims: Help students read and listen carefully for specific information ❖ Contents: Students work individual/ pairs/ groups. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-reading Exercise 2: -Teacher reads through the sentences with the class and make sure students understand rare. -Teacher points out that for this task students need to read and listen carefully for specific information, to find out if the sentence is true or false. (With stronger classes, teacher could ask students to correct the false sentences.) -Students read the text and work in pairs to decide which statement is true or false -Teacher checks answers with the class.

QU Y

Suggested answer beautiful – ugly, common – rare, dull – colourful

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ comprehension ❖ Organization: Post-reading Exercise 4: -Teacher gives the questions: ?” Do you know the names of any animals in danger? Do you think which ones are ugly and which ones are beautiful?” - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers to the questions individually. -Students discuss the questions in pairs.

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Do you know the names of any animals in danger? Do you think which ones are ugly and which ones are beautiful? ( Students’ own answers )


FI CI A

L

-Teacher asks some students to report back to the class, and discuss as a class which animals are in danger and which animals are ugly or beautiful.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 3: Language focus Superlative adjectives

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about your country using superlative adjectives 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Brainstorm ❖ Aims: Teacher elicits the information Example : bear, snake, octopus from students about the comparision, then leads in the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups ❖ Products: Students’ sentences ❖ Organization: -Teacher asks students to close their book and writes the names of three animals on the board, for example: bear, snake, octopus, then asks: ? “Which are ugly and which are beautiful? Is a snake uglier than an octopus? Is a bear more beautiful than a snake?” -As students answer, teacher writes sentences with comparative adjectives on the board, then asks: ? “Which is the ugliest of the three? Which is the most beautiful?”


L FI CI A

ƠN

OF

 Change into comparative adjectives New -> newer Nice -> nicer Friendly -> friendlier Fit -> fitter Comfortable -> more comfortable  GRAMMAR. Superlative adjectives  With short adjectives: S + be + the + short adj-est.  With long adjectives: S + be + the most + long adj. Language note -For most short adjectives, we form comparatives and superlatives by adding -er and -est: old – older – oldest. -The adjective ends in -e, we just add -r and -st: safe – safer – safest. -Final -y changes to -ier and -iest: pretty –prettier – prettiest. -We sometimes double the final consonant: big – bigger – biggest. -Some comparative and superlative adjectives are irregular: good – better – best, bad – worse – worst. -We use THE with superlative adjectives: It’s the ugliest animal. (NOT It’s ugliest animal.) Suggested answer the weirdest, the slowest, the rarest, the safest, the ugliest , the prettiest, the biggest, the hottest, the most common, the most expensive, the best

QU Y

NH

-Teacher elicits answers and writes sentences with superlative adjectives on the board. -Teacher underlines the comparative and superlative adjectives and tell students they are going to study these now. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the rules of superlative adjectives ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the teacher’s guide and work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ note taking ❖ Organization: -Teacher asks students if they can remember the rules to form comparative adjectives. Write these adjectives in a column on the board: new, nice, friendly, fit, comfortable. Elicit the comparative form of each one: newer, nicer, friendlier, fitter, more comfortable, and the spelling rules, and write them on the board.

DẠ

Y

M

Exercise 1: -Teacher asks students complete the table of superlatives. -Students do the task in pairs -Teacher highlights the use of THE before each superlative adjective and points out that they do not use THAN after a superlative. -Teacher asks students to write the superlative forms of the adjectives in the box. (With weaker classes, do this exercise with the whole class. Check answers with the class)


L FI CI A

Suggested answer 1. hottest 2. warmest 3. coldest 4. best 5. highest 6. the most interesting

OF

 STUDY STRATEGY Improving your grammar Inventing sentences is a good way to remember grammar rules and improve your grammar

3.Read the Study Strategy. Then write five sentences with your ideas. Use the adjectives and the topics in the boxes. Compare with a partner.

QU Y

NH

Exercise 3: -Teacher asks student to read aloud the Study strategy -Students read and remember how to remember grammar rules and improve grammar -Teacher gives an example and ask students to write sentences with their own ideas, using the adjectives and topics in the box -Students write their sentences individually, then compare with their partners. -Teacher calls some students to write the sentences and give feedback

2.Complete the text using the superlative form of the adjectives in brackets.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the structures they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: -Students read and complete the text, then compare their answers in pairs. -Teacher checks grammar with the class.

M

Exercise 4: -Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers individually. Put students into groups to ask and answer the questions -Students work in groups -Teacher asks students to ask and answer then gives feedback

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the superlative adjectives ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ sentences

Example : I think the best football team is Arsenal. In my opinion, the most horrible animals are spiders. ( Students’ own answer)

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Read the text in exercise 2 again. Ask and answer questions with superlative adjectives for clues 1 – 6. ( Students’ own answer)


L

µ Finish? Write sentences about another national park in your country using the questions in exercise 4. ( Students’ own answer)

FI CI A

v Organization: - Students can write their sentences individually and compare with another fast finisher. -Alternatively, teacher asks them to read their sentences to the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all structures. -Prepare the next lesson


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening Amazing animals

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand a podcast about animal skills - develop students’ listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand the situation and lead in new lesson ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: -Teacher reads the sentence with the class and elicits responses from individual students. ? “Can you name three fast-running animals?” -Teacher asks more questions to encourage longer answers. For example: “ How fast do you think ostriches can run? What other animals can run fast?”

 THINK! Name three fast-running animals. (Students’ own answers.)


L FI CI A

ƠN

OF

1.Check the meanings of the verbs in the box. Look at the quiz and complete the questions with eight of the verbs. Listen and check your answers.  New words -communicate (v): to share information with others by speaking, writing, moving your body, or using other signals -fly (v): When a bird, insect, or aircraft flies, it moves through the air -jump (v): to push yourself suddenly off the ground and into the air using your legs -survive (v): to continue to live or exist, especially after coming close to dying or being destroyed or after being in a difficult or threatening situation -kill (v): to cause someone or something to die -climb (v): to go up, or to go towards the top of something -grow (v): to increase in size or amount, or to become more advanced or developed -move (v): to go to a different place to live or work

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the vocabularies to do a quiz. ❖ Contents: Students work individual/pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Pre-listening -Teacher leads in the new lesson: “Some animals are fast, some are big and strong. Some are intelligent, some are dangerous. What do you know about animals and their skills? We will find out in this lesson” Exercise 1: -Teacher checks that students understand skills. -Students use their dictionaries to check the meanings of the verbs in the box and complete the questions in the quiz. ( With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this.) -Teacher presents some new words and asks students to listen and repeat -Students listen and repeat, then copy down -Teacher plays the audio for students to check their answers. -Teacher gives feedback

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-listening Exercise 2: -Teacher allows students time to read again the quiz, then asks them to work in pairs -Students work in pairs to answer the questions in the quiz.

Suggested answers 1. hear 2. grow 5. survive 6. see

3. kill 4. drink 7. see 8. fly 9. run

2.Work in pairs. Answer questions 1–6 in the quiz


L

FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers 1a ; 2c ; 3c ; 4b ; 5b ; 6c

4. Read the Skills Strategy and listen again. What two extra pieces of information do you hear? Choose from a–d  SKILLS STRATEGY How to do the listening quiz: • First, read all the questions and options. • Next, predict the general meaning of the text. • Then, focus on the detail you need and then choose the correct option

NH

Exercise 3: -Teacher plays the audio. -Students listen and check their answers to the quiz. -Teacher points out that students must listen very carefully to hear the details of each answer. -Teacher checks answers with the class. See which pair got the most correct answers, and ask students : ? “Which animal do you think is the most amazing and why?” Exercise 4: -Teacher asks students to read the skills strategy before doing exercise 4. Allow students time to read the sentences. Point out that students must listen very carefully to hear the specific information they need. -Teacher play the audio again. -Students decide which extra pieces of information they hear. -Teacher checks answers with the class. (With weaker classes, play the audio again, if necessary, pausing after the relevant parts for students to hear the extra information.)

3.Listen to a podcast about the animals in the quiz and check your answers. How many correct answers have you got?

ƠN

-Teacher does not check the answers at this stage

b and c

QU Y

Suggested answers :

Y

M

 Optional activity: Listening Answer the questions Optional activity: 1. How do elephants hear with their feet? -Teachers dictate these questions to the class, 2. What helps gorillas to survive? or write them on the board 3. What examples of animals communicating - Students work in pairs and discuss the does the podcast give? answers to the questions from memory. 4. What is our most important skill, according to -Teacher plays the audio again for them to the podcast? check their answers. Suggested answer : 1. They feel sounds in the ground. 2. They are big, strong and intelligent. 3. Whales and monkeys 4. We can speak

DẠ

Post-listening 5.USE IT! Work in pairs. Ask and answer the Exercise 5: questions about the animals in unit 3. Who -Teacher allows students time to prepare can answer the most questions? their answers individually. Point out that they (Students’ own answers)


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

can talk about any of the animals in this unit. -Students then ask and answer the questions in pairs. -Teacher discusses the answers with the class and see which students answered the most questions. ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION  Finish? Look at exercise 5 again and write ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the more questions using the verbs in exercise 1 lesson and the animals in unit 3 ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: -Teacher refers fast finishers to the Finished? activity. -Students can write their questions individually and swap with another fast finisher to answer. -Alternatively, teacher asks students to read their questions to the class. See if other students can answer them ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 5: Language focus • “can” for ability • might for possibility • Questions with “How … ?”

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use: - “can” for ability - might for possibility - Questions with “How … ?” 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discuss ion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Brainstorm: ❖ Aims: Help students identify and understand the situation of comparing things using comparative adjectives. ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ comparison ❖ Organization: ? What can ostriches ? What can camels -Teacher asks students close their books, and do? do?” asks students about the animals on page 38. -> Ostriches can run -> Camels can For example: fast. survive without water. ? “What can ostriches do? What can camels do?” -Teacher elicits answers and writes sentences on the board. For example: Ostriches can run fast. Camels can survive without water.


L FI CI A

 “CAN” FOR ABILITY 1.Complete the examples from the quiz on page 42. Then choose the correct answers in Rules 1–4

3. Can 7. can

ƠN

OF

Suggested answers 1. can 2. can’t 5. can’t 6. Can

Rules: 1. can 2. can’t 4. the same

NH

-Teacher underlines CAN and asks students to translate the sentences into their own language ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand how to use CAN for ability . ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the structures and work individual/pairs. ❖ Products: Students understand the structures. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: -Students complete the examples from the quiz. -Teacher checks answers, and checks that students understand the difference between CAN and CAN’T. -Teacher reads through the rules with the class and elicits the correct answers. -Student follow to the teacher’s guide and remember the Rules -Teacher gives some language notes -Students listen and copy down

4. can 8. can’t

3. can and can’t

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Language note -CAN and CAN’T are the same for all persons: I can / can’t, you can / can’t, he can / can’t, etc.  S + can + V -CAN / CAN’T is always followed by the base form of the verb: He can swim. (NOT He can swims.)  S + can’t + V ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE -We form questions by putting can before the ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge subject: Can they swim? (NOT Do they can they have learnt to do the tasks given. swim?) ❖ Contents: Students work in  Can + S + V ? individual/pairs/groups Yes, S + can / No, S + can’t ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: 2.Complete the dialogue with can and can’t -Students complete the dialogue with can and can’t, then compare their answers in pairs. Suggested answers -Teacher checks answers with the class 1. can 2. can 3. can 4. can’t 5. can  “MIGHT” FOR POSSIBILITY


FI CI A

L

Exercise 3: 3.Look at the examples of sentences with -Teacher reads the example sentences to the might. Then choose the correct answers in the class, or ask for a confident volunteer. Rules. -Teacher asks students to read the rules and choose the correct options. -Students work in pairs to complete the Rules -Teacher checks understanding of the usage.  S + might + V Suggested answers: don’t know, the same

ƠN

OF

 QUESTIONS WITH “HOW … ?” 4.Complete the quiz questions with the words in the box. Then listen and check Example: … is a new baby? How heavy is a new baby?  How + adj + be (is/am/are) …? Suggested answers: 1. How fast 2. How many 4. How long 5. How far

3. How tall

NH

Exercise 4: -Teacher reads out the example and elicit another from the class. -Students complete the quiz questions then compare their answers in pairs. -Teacher plays the audio for them to listen and check

5. Look at the Key Phrases. Answer the questions in exercise 4 with the information in the box. Use the Key Phrases. Then compare with a partner.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Exercise 5: -Teacher reads the key phrases with the class and checks that students understand them all. -Students write answers to the questions in exercise 5 then compare with a partner. (With weaker classes, students could write their answers in pairs then compare with another pair.) -Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers 1. Around 44 kilometres an hour 2. 195 (recognised by the United Nations) 3. Between 5 and 6 metres 4. Around 4 metres 5. 20,014 kilometres


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart the structures. -Do exercises ( in workbook ) -Prepare for next lesson – Speaking

L FI CI A

OF

(Students’ own answers)  Finish? Invent more questions for the quiz in exercise 4 (Students’ own answers)

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way the use question with “How…?” ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ questions ❖ Organization: -Refer fast finishers to the Finished? activity. -Students can write their questions individually then ask and answer them with another fast finisher. -Alternatively, teacher asks fast finishers to read their questions to the class.

6. USE IT! Ask and answer questions with “How … ?”. Find people in the class with the same answers as yours.

ƠN

Exercise 6: -Teacher allows students time to prepare their questions. Ask some students to read their questions to the class and correct any errors. -Students prepare their own answers


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Asking for permission

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE Lesson 6: Speaking

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask for permission to do things. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm and lead in new lesson ❖ Contents: Students look at the places in the box and work in individual ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization: -Teacher checks that students understand “ask for permission”. Focus on the places in the box. Read the question with the class and THINK! Look at the places in the box.Where elicit answers from individual students. do you usually ask for permission? -Students answer on their own -Teacher asks students more questions to encourage them to say more. For example: ? “Who do you usually ask for permission? (Students’ own answers.) What do you ask permission for?”

1.Look at the photo. What is the situation?


FI CI A

ƠN

OF

(Students’ own answers.)

2.Watch or listen and complete the dialogue with the phrases in the box. Check your answer to exercise 1. When can Lottie watch the TV programme? Suggested answers 1. watch that wildlife programme on TV 2. It’s really good. 3. it’s time for dinner 4. watch TV later She can watch the TV programme later

 Optional activity: Speaking

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students understand the way of asking for permission as well as develop speaking skill ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization While-speaking Exercise 2: -Teacher allows students time to read through the gapped dialogue. Play the video or audio for students to watch or listen and complete the dialogue with the phrases in the box. -Students read the dialogue quickly then complete the task -Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to check their answers. -Students listen carefully again -Teacher checks answers with the class then ask the question from exercise 1 again. Elicit the answer. Optional activity: -Teacher plays the audio or video again, pausing after each question asking for permission. Get students to repeat the questions and encourage them to copy the intonation on the recording. Exercise 3:

L

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students open mind about the situation they may have in the lesson ❖ Contents: Students set up the situation ❖ Products: Students’ opinion ❖ Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: -Teacher asks students focus on the photo and elicits some possible situations: ? “ Where are they? What are they talking about?” -Students answer on their own -Teacher encourages students to speculate.

3. Look at the dialogue again. Match phrases a–d with 1–4 in the dialogue to create a new situation. Then practise the dialogue.


L

Suggested answers 1. b ; 2. d ; 3. a ; 4. c

OF

FI CI A

4.Match a–f with 1–3 in the Key Phrases. There is more than one correct answer.

ƠN

Suggested answers a. 3; b. 1 and 2 ;c 3 ;d .1 and 2; e. 1 and 2; f. 3

5. Work in pairs. Make mini-dialogues with the situations in exercise 4 and the Key Phrases (Students’ own answers.)

QU Y

NH

-Students work individually or in pairs to match the phrases with the sentences in the dialogue. -Teacher checks answers then puts students into pairs to practise the new dialogue Exercise 4: -Teacher reads through the gapped key phrases with the class. Ask students to find the key phrases in the dialogue, and check they understand everything. Remind students that they should try to learn key phrases. -Students match a–f with 1–3 in the key phrases. -Teacher checks answers with the class Post-speaking Exercise 5: -Teacher demonstrates by working with a confident student and creating a mini dialogue, taking one of the roles yourself. -Students work in pairs to prepare and practice their mini-dialogues. -Teacher monitors while they are working and encourages them to use intonation to make the dialogue realistic. -Teacher asks some pairs to perform their dialogues for the class.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way of asking permission ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to make a new dialogue ❖ Products: Students’ conversation ❖ Organization: -Students work in pairs to prepare a new dialogue for the situation in the box. -Students swap roles and practise again. -Teacher asks some students to perform their dialogues for the class. ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK (1’) - Learn by heart all the structures. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Look at the situation. Prepare and practise a new dialogue. Use the dialogue in exercise 2 and the Key Phrases.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

FI CI A

L

Lesson 7: Writing Animals in danger

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write an information leaflet about animals in danger and give examples - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents ` THINK! Look at the animals on pages 38 and 39. Which animals are in danger? Which animals do you want to protect?

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students observe the pictures and work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: -Teacher asks the questions to the class and elicits answers from individual students. Ask more questions to encourage students to speak more. For example: ? “Which other animals are in danger? Why do you want to protect these animals? How can we protect them?”

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students have an idea of writing description of a town or a city

Questions: 1.Which other animals are in danger? 2.Why do you want to protect these animals? 3.How can we protect them? Suggested answers: Pandas, gorillas, whales and elephants are in danger.


(or students’ own answers.)

FI CI A

L

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box. Which of these do you think is a problem for the Philippine eagle? Read the information leaflet and check.

OF

v Contents: Students work individual to check the meaning of given words ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of given words ❖ Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: -Teacher reads the question with the class and checks they understand Philippines. -Students check the meanings of the words in the box using their dictionaries. Students work in pairs to discuss which they think is a problem for the Philippine eagle. Students read the informational leaflet to check their answer -Teacher gives feedback

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

 New words: -farming (n): the activity of working on a farm or organizing the work there ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE -pollution (n): damage caused to water, air, etc. ❖ Aims: Help student how to write an by harmful substances or waste information leaflet about animals in danger -hunting (v): chasing and killing an animal or and give examples as well as develop writing bird for food, sport, or profit skill Suggested answers: farming ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-writing Exercise 2: -Students read the text again and answer 2. Read the text again. Why is the Philippine the questions. eagle special? What kinds of animals does it -Teacher checks answers with the class, eat? and checks students understand adopt. Suggested answers: It’s one of the biggest birds in the world, and it’s in danger and very rare. It eats snakes and small animals such as bats, rats and small monkeys. Exercise 3: -Students complete the key phrases. 3.Complete the Key Phrases with words from -Teacher checks answers and checks that the text. students understand all the phrases

Suggested answers: 1. eight kilos / one metre long


L

FI CI A

 LANGUAGE POINT: Giving examples 4.Look at the phrases in blue in the text. Which can we use at the start of a sentence? Which has a comma (,) after it?

OF

Exercise 4: -Teacher focuses on the phrases in blue in the text and elicits that they are all used for giving examples. Elicit which one we can use at the start of a sentence and which one has a comma after it. -Teacher points out that although the three phrases have a similar meaning, they are used in different ways in a sentence

2. small animals ... snakes, bats and rats 3. in danger 4. on the website (of the Philippine Eagle Foundation)

ƠN

Suggested answers: We can use “For example” at the start of a sentence. “For example” has a comma after it. 5.Complete the sentences. Use such as, like, For example and your own ideas

NH

Exercise 5: -Students complete the sentences then check their answers in pairs. -Teacher asks some students to read their sentences to the class. Correct any errors

QU Y

Optional activity: -Teacher writes the following on the board: - Teacher asks students to look at the text again and choose the three questions on the board. Check answers with the class and point out that in an information leaflet it is a good idea to make the readers think by asking questions. -Students follow the teacher’s guide

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to write an information leaflet about the Galapagos penguin or an animal in danger in Việt Nam ❖ Contents: Students work in groups ❖ Products: Students’ writing ❖ Organization: -Teacher reads the task with the class. -Students answer the questions and plan their leaflets.

(Students’ own answers)

 Optional activity: Writing 1. What can you do? 2. What do we know about it? 3. Who knows about the problem? 4. Why is it in danger? Suggested answers: 1. What do we know about it? 2. Why is it in danger? 3. What can you do? 6.USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing guide.


FI CI A

L

-Teacher reads through the paragraph structure with the class. -Students write their leaflets. (This can be set for homework). -Teacher reminds students to check their grammar and spelling carefully

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 8: CLIL. Natural science Animals

L

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - talk about the different animal groups - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students work individual to draw picture as requested while others will guess what picture is ❖ Products: Students’ drawing and guessing ❖ Organization: -Teacher asks students to close their book and writes the names of some different types of animals on the board. For example: dog, ostrich, snake, frog, fish. ? What are the differences between these animals? -Teacher elicits some ideas from students then leads in new lesson

Contents Brainstorm Example: dog, ostrich, snake, frog, fish. ? What are the differences between these animals? Suggested answers An ostrich is a bird, birds and fish lay eggs, frogs and fish live in water


L FI CI A

 New words -vertebrate (n): động vật có xương -mammal(n) động vật có vú -amphibian(n): lưỡng cư -reptile (n): bò sát

OF

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the meaning of the words ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to match the words with the pictures ❖ Products: Students can understand the words ❖ Organization: -Teacher shows some new words, then asks students to listen and repeat -Students listen and repeat, then copy down

NH

ƠN

Exercise 1: -Students work in pairs to check the meanings of the words and match them with the 1.Check the meanings of the words in the box pictures. and match them with pictures 1–9. Then -Teacher checks answers with the class and complete the text with the correct words checks that students understand all the words. -Students then read the text and complete it with the correct words. -Teacher does not check these answers at this stage.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students talk about the different animal groups ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and groups ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization Exercise 2: -Teacher plays the audio. -Students listen and read, and check their answers to exercise 1. -Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 3: -Students read the text again and answer the questions. They can compare their answers in pairs. -Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 4: -Teacher checks that students understand the animal words in the box. Ask the questions

Suggested answers 1. legs 2. hair 3. wings 5. fins 6. backbones 7. gills 9. feathers

4. lungs 8. scales

2.Read and listen to the text. Check your answers in exercise 1. Suggested answers 1. fins 2. gills 3. Lungs 4. feathers 5. wings 6. legs 7. scales 8. hair 3.Read the text again and answer the questions Suggested answers 1. Fish 2. Fish and reptiles 3. Amphibians 4. Mammals 5. Amphibians 4.Which group are these animals from? Use the information to classify them.


FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers A crocodile is a reptile. A shark is a fish. A camel is a mammal. An eagle is a bird

ƠN

 Optional activity: Writing Write about insects Suggested answers Insects are animals without backbones. They are cold-blooded and they have six legs. They live on land. They have hard bodies and they don’t have lungs. They breathe through special holes in their bodies. They lay eggs, but they don’t feed their young

NH

Optional activity: -Teacher writes the word insect on the board. Elicit or explain that insects are invertebrates. For homework, ask students to find out information about insects and write a few sentences about them, similar to sentences in the text on page 46. In the next lesson, put students into groups to compare their sentences and write a short description of insects similar to the descriptions in the text. Ask each group in turn to read out their description and build up a final description on the board.

L

in the chart for the first animal with the class as an example. -Students then work in pairs and use the chart to classify the other animals. -Teacher checks answers with the class.

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to talk about the different animal groups ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to ask and answer about animals ❖ Products: Students’ conversation ❖ Organization: -Teacher thinks of an animal. For example: a snake. Tell students you are thinking about an animal and they must guess what it is. Encourage students to ask you the questions from the chart in exercise 4 and their own questions to guess what it is. -Students then work in pairs to each think of animals and ask questions to guess. -Teacher asks some students how many animals they guessed correctly.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Write a few sentences about insects - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

5.USE IT! Work in groups. Think of an animal. Ask and answer the questions in exercise 4 and your own questions. Guess the animals. (Students’ own answers)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 3: WILD LIFE

FI CI A

L

Lesson 9: Options Puzzles and games

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all lessons in Unit 3. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents Game: ANIMAL ART 1.ANIMAL ART. Work in groups of three. Take turns drawing and guessing animals from unit 3. One student draws an animal for the other two students. The first student to guess the correct animal wins a point. The winner is the student with the most points. Example :

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students warm-up and lead in the new lesson ❖ Contents: Students work groups to play the game ❖ Products: Students’ guessing ❖ Organization: -Teacher draws an animal on the board and gets students to guess what it is. -Teacher puts students into groups of three to draw animals and guess. -Students play game as directed -Teacher stops the game after a few minutes and sees who in the class has the most points

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students revise some vocabularies related to animals

giraffe (Students’ own answers)


L FI CI A

OF

(Students’ own answers)

3. STAND IN ORDER. Work in groups. Each student chooses an animal from page 38. Write your animal on a piece of paper. Look at the adjectives in the box. One person says a superlative, for example, ‘the fastest!’. Stand in order, with the fastest animal on the left. Then repeat the activity with a different adjective

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop skills ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and groups to do the tasks ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization Exercise 3: -Teacher reads out the instructions and uses the picture to explain the game. Ask students individually to choose an animal and write it on a piece of paper. Put students into groups and ask them to stand up. -Teacher asks each group to nominate someone to call out the superlative adjectives. The caller calls out a superlative adjective and students put themselves in order. -Teacher monitors and helps while students are working. Encourage students to speak in English and negotiate their position in the order using comparatives and superlatives. For example: A bear is faster than a fish. An ostrich is the fastest.

2.ADJECTIVE RACE. Work in teams. The teacher says an adjective from page 40. How many things can you write for each adjective in thirty seconds? You get one point for each thing. The team with the most points wins.

ƠN

v Contents: Students work in groups to complete the race ❖ Products: Students can write as many things as they can ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: -Teacher divides the class into groups of three or four. -Teacher reads out adjectives from page 40 in turn and allows students 30 seconds to write as many things as they can. -Students work in groups to write down things for each adjective -Teacher writes each adjective on the board and elicits what students wrote for each one. -Teacher sees which team has the most points

(Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

-Students could play a similar game about themselves, using adjectives such as the oldest, the tallest, the fastest.

4.Read the clues and complete the crossword.

OF

Exercise 4: -Students read the clues and complete the crossword. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this. With stronger classes, you could do it as a race). -Teacher checks answers with the class.

5.WHAT AM I? Work in pairs. Put the words in order to make sentences. Can you guess the animals?

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 5: -Students work individually or in pairs to put the words in order and guess the animals. -Teacher checks answers with the class. (With stronger classes, students or fast finishers could work in pairs to make a similar puzzle of their own. They could swap with another pair and try to solve the puzzle they have been given. )

ƠN

Suggested answers Across: 1. climb 3. run 6. swim 7. survive 8. eat Down: 2. months 4. jump 5. hear 6. speak

Suggested answers 1. I’ve got eight legs. I’m quite big. I can swim. Octopus 2. I’m a large bird from Africa. I can run fast. I can’t fly. Ostrich 3. I’m a very dangerous animal. I’ve got a very big mouth. I’m long and green. Crocodile


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have learnt ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ questions 6.ASK ME A QUESTION! Work in pairs. ❖ Organization: Follow the instructions. -Teacher reads the instructions with the class and points out that in this game the important thing is to ask questions, not to answer them. -Teacher points out that for a question to count, it must be correctly formed, and students cannot repeat a question that has already been used. -Students play the game in pairs. -Teacher monitors and helps while they are working, and be prepared to step in and confirm whether a question is correct or not. -Teacher stops when one student has reached five questions (Students’ own answers) ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

I./. OBJECTIVES

FI CI A

Lesson 1: Vocabulary School subjects

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - talk about my school and school subjects. - develop students’ speaking and listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm what they are going to study. ❖ Contents: Students apply their knowledge to the situations, then work in pairs to answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students answer about themselves. ❖ Organization: - Teacher puts students into pairs to ask and answer the questions: ? “How many lessons have you got today? When are your break times? Is today an easy day or a difficult day for you?” - Teacher points out that at this stage they should just talk about the number of lessons they have, but they don’t need to say what the lessons are if they don’t know

 THINK! How many lessons have you got today? When are your break times? Is today an easy day or a difficult day for you? (Students’ own answers.)


FI CI A

L

1. Look at pictures 1–9. Then complete the questions with the words in the box. Listen and check your answers.

OF

the words in English. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to school and school subjects. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. ❖ Organization:

- art (n): (picture)

- geography (n): (picture) - history (n): past events considered together, especially events of a particular period, country, or subject (explanation) - ICT (Information and Communication Technology): Công nghệ thông tin và truyền thông

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 1: - Teacher reads through the gapped questions with the class and makes sure students understand all the words in blue. - Students complete the questions using pictures 1–9 and the words in the box. They can use their dictionaries to check the names of subjects, if necessary. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs to do this. With stronger classes, teacher could do it as a race.) - Teacher checks that students understand all the school subjects and models pronunciation of difficult words. Point out that PE and ICT are pronounced as letters. Then ask students to listen and repeat. - Students listen and repeat.

ƠN

 New words

DẠ

Y

- Check-up: Slap the board

- maths (n): (picture) - PE (Physical Education): môn giáo dục thể chất - science (n): Science also refers to subjects which are studied like a science (explanation) - Spanish (n): người Tây Ban Nha, tiếng Tây Ban Nha - concentrate (v):


FI CI A

Suggested answers 1. PE 2. geography 4. science 5. ICT 7. history 8. English

L

Example: I couldn't concentrate on my work my mind was on other things. - make notes (v): ghi chú

- Teacher plays the audio for students to check their answers. - Teacher check answers with the class.

3. maths 6. Spanish 9. art

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students write and talk about school subjects ❖ Contents: Students work in individual/ pairs/ groups to complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Students ask and answer the questions in the School questionnaire in pairs. (With weaker classes, teacher allows students to prepare their answers first.) - Teacher asks some students to tell the class 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the something they learned about their partner. questions in the School questionnaire. Elicit one or two example sentences from the class. (Students’ own answers.) Optional activity: Vocabulary - Teacher asks students to choose three school subjects from page 48 and draw their own pictures to illustrate them. - Students works in pairs to do teacher’s request. - Teacher encourages students to be creative! When they have finished, ask them to close their books and swap pictures with a partner.  Optional activity: Vocabulary - Students try to guess the subjects they have been given. They could repeat with a different partner for more practice.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher introduces the task and gives questions: ? “Why does Georgia like Wednesday? What language does Ben prefer?” - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen - Students listen to the audio

3. Watch or listen and answer the questions Suggested answers - Georgia likes Wednesday because she has her two favourite subjects: maths and geography. - Ben prefers Spanish.


FI CI A

OF

4. Watch or listen again and complete the Key Phrases. Suggested answers 1. I’ve got a bit of maths homework. 2. Our art teacher is very strict. 3. I’m not great at science. 4. I’m really good at history. 5. I enjoy French. 6. I’m OK at French. 7. I prefer Spanish.

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to read through the gapped key phrases. Play the video or audio again for students to complete the phrases. Check answers and check that students understand all the key phrases. (With stronger classes, teacher could elicit a few more phrases, for example: I’m very bad at …, I love …, I don’t enjoy … ) - Students follow the teacher’s guide

L

-Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to check their answers. (With weaker classes, pause after each conversation to check that students have understood.) - Teacher plays the conversation again, if necessary, for students to hear the answer. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 5: 5. USE IT! Complete the Key Phrases so that - Students complete the key phrases so that they are true for you. Then compare with your they are true for them. partner. - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the example conversation. Elicit one or (Students’ own answers.) two questions that students could ask their partner about school subjects, for example: ? “What are you good at? Do you enjoy English? Do you prefer Maths or French? Is your Maths teacher strict?” (With weaker classes, write some example questions on the board.) - Students ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class something they learned about their partner.

DẠ

Y

Optional activity: Vocabulary - Teacher asks students to write three  Optional activity: Vocabulary sentences using the key phrases, two true and one false.


DẠ

Y

M

FI CI A

OF

NH

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all the new words. -Prepare for next lesson

 Finish? Write two text messages to a friend. Invent a very good day at school and a very bad day at school.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can write the sentences about their places in town or city. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. ❖ Products: Student’s opinions ❖ Organization: - Students can write their messages individually and compare with another fast finisher. - Teacher asks students to read their messages to the class. Ask other students if the sentences are also true for them

L

- Students work with a new partner and take turns reading out their sentences. Their partner must guess which one is false. -Teacher asks who guessed correctly


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

FI CI A

L

Lesson 2: Reading Schools project

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - identify the writer’s opinion. - use vocabulary items related to the issue of passage. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm some good things about the school. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ opinions ❖ Organization: -Teacher puts students into pairs to discuss the question and notes down three things they like about their school: ? “What do you like about your school?” - Students put pairs together into groups of four to compare their ideas and choose three that they all agree with. - Teacher asks groups in turn to report back to the class. Make notes on the board as each group reports back.

Contents

 THINK! What do you like about your school? Suggested answers - It’s a nice building. - There are good sports facilities. - The teachers are friendly.

3. VOCABULARY PLUS. Use a dictionary to


L

FI CI A

OF

- boat school (n): (picture) - boarding school (n): a school where students live and study.

- digital learning (n): (picture) - secondary school (n): a school for children between the ages of 11 and 18.

M

QU Y

NH

Pre-reading -Teacher asks students to read four passages and check the meanings of the words in blue. -Teacher introduces some new words, uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. - Check-up: Rub out and remember

check the meanings of the words in blue in the text.  New words - primary school (n): a school for children from the ages of about five to nine, or an elementary school.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to the school. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. ❖ Organization:

DẠ

Y

Optional activity: Vocabulary plus - Teacher writes these definitions on the board and asks students to fill in the gaps. - Students complete the sentences with the correct types of school. - Teacher checks the answers with the class.

- musical instruments (n): (picture) - traditional (adj): truyền thống, theo truyền thống. - transport (n): a system of vehicles, such as buses, trains, aircraft, etc. for getting from one place to another.

- village (n): (picture) - practical (adj): thực hành, thực tế  Optional activity: Vocabulary plus 1. A….. is on the water. 2. People pay to go to a.…. . 3. Students sleep and eat in a.…. . 4. A….. is for younger children. 5. …..is a new learning way for Vietnamese students.


L

FI CI A

1. Read the project. Where are the schools? Is the writer positive or negative about them?

OF

Suggested answers School 1: Bangladesh, positive School 2: Britain, negative School 3: Việt Nam, positive School 4: Ireland, positive

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students identify the writer’s opinion as well as develop reading skill. ❖ Contents: Students work individual/ pairs/ groups. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-reading Exercise 2: - Teacher reads through the questions. Point out that students need to read and listen carefully to find specific information in order to answer the questions. - Students discuss in groups. - Teacher plays the audio for students to complete their answers.

2. private school 4. primary school

ƠN

Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to focus on the photos. Point out that for this task they need to think about the writer’s opinion of each school. - Students read the project and answer the questions. They can compare their ideas in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class, encouraging students to point to sentences in the text which confirm the answers.

Suggested answers 1. boat school 3. boarding school 5. Digital learning

DẠ

Y

Optional activity: Reading - Teacher write these definitions on the board and asks students to fill in the gaps. - Students work in pairs to find words in the project to complete the definitions. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

2. Read and listen to the project and answer the questions. Suggested answers 1. When there’s a lot of rain. 2. A school where students study, eat and sleep. 3. Digital learning  Optional activity: Reading 1. Something that is…. costs a lot of money. 2. Something that is…. isn’t new, but is the same as it was in the past. Suggested answers 1. expensive

2. traditional


QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ comprehension 4. USE IT! Work in groups. Which school in ❖ Organization: exercise 1 do you think is the most interesting? Post-reading Why? What type of school do you go to? - Teacher introduces the task and gives the questions: (Students’ own answers.) ? “Which school in exercise 1 do you think is the most interesting? Why? What type of school do you go to?” - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers to the questions individually, then asks them to work in pairs. - Students discuss the questions in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to report back to the class, and discuss as a class which types of school are the most interesting or appealing. Ask more questions to extend the discussion and encourage students to express their opinions, for example: ? “Do you wear a school uniform? Do you do traditional dancing? Would you like time to listen to music during the day?”

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 3: Language focus Present continuous: affirmative and negative

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about things happening now. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Teacher elicits the information from students about the present continuous, then leads in the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answer ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to turn to page 50 again and focus on the photos. Point to each photo in turn and ask questions using the present continuous: ? “What are the people doing? What are they wearing? Is the boat moving?” - As students answer, teacher writes sentences on the board using the present continuous, for example: They’re dancing. They’re wearing school uniforms. The boat isn’t moving.

Contents

Brainstorm What are the people doing? -> They are dancing. What are they wearing? -> They are wearing school uniforms. Is the boat moving? -> The boat isn’t moving.


FI CI A

L

 GRAMMAR. PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE- AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE  (+) S + is/am/are + V-ing Ex: They are watching TV now  (-) S + is/am/are + not + V-ing (is not = isn’t ; are not = aren’t) Ex: I am not listening to music at the moment

OF

➔We use present continuous tense to talk about things happening now. 1. Complete the examples from the text on page 50. Then choose the correct words in Rules 1–3

ƠN

- Teacher underlines the verbs and tells students they are in the present continuous, and they are going to study this now. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the rules of the present continuous. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the teacher’s guide and work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ note taking ❖ Organization: - Teacher introduces new structure in this lesson and asks students to remember. - Students listen and copy down

QU Y

NH

Exercise 1: - Students complete the sentences with the examples from the text. - Teacher checks answers, then reads through the rules with the class and elicits the correct Suggested answers 1. are 2. isn’t 3. are staying at, learning answers. 4. watching Rules: 1. things happening now 2. be 3. -ing

DẠ

Y

M

Exercise 2: - Students find the present continuous forms of the verbs in the text. - Teacher elicits the answers and writes the verb forms on the board. Put students into pairs to read the spelling rules and match the verbs to the rules. - Students work in pairs - Teacher checks answers with the class and asks students to find more verb forms in the text to match to the rules.

2. What are the present continuous forms of verbs 1–5? Read the Spelling Rules and match the verbs to Rules 1–3.

Suggested answers 1. wearing 2. having 4. dancing 5. Sitting Rules:

3. doing


L

FI CI A

3. Listen to the sounds. Match the people in column A with the actions in column B. Then write sentences using the present continuous.

OF

- run (v): (picture)

- park (n): (picture)

- mosquito (n): (picture)

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 3: - Teacher reads through the prompts with the class and checks that students understand run, park and mosquito. Teacher reads some difficult words and asks students to repeat. - Students listen and repeat. - Teacher plays the first sound and points out the example match. Play the remaining sounds for students to complete the matching task. - Students follow the teacher’s guide. - Teacher plays the audio again, if necessary, for students to check and complete their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Read out the example sentence and elicit another example from the class. - Students write the sentences. - Teacher reminds them to think about the spelling of the -ing forms. - Students can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers and writes the -ing forms on the board for students to check their spelling.

1. wearing, doing (playing, sleeping, walking, watching) 2. having, dancing (moving) 3. sitting

ƠN

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the structures they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization

Example: A young child is speaking to his mother Suggested answers 1- d. A young child is speaking to his mother. 2- c. Two women are running in the park. 3- b. Two men are having dinner. 4-f. A girl is playing a musical instrument. 5- a. A boy is watching TV. 6- e. A man is looking for a mosquito. 4. Find six differences between the pictures. Write three affirmative and three negative sentences about picture B. Use the present continuous.


L FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers 1. The boy is sitting next to the teacher. 2. The birds are flying. 3. The people on the poster are dancing. 4. The teacher isn’t reading. 5. The girl isn’t eating. 6. The students aren’t wearing uniforms.

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Invent three minidialogues with the situations in the box or your own ideas. Which dialogue is the best?

QU Y

NH

Exercise 5: - Teacher asks two students to read out the example mini-dialogue. - Students work in pairs to write their own dialogues. - Teacher allows students time to practise their dialogues, then asks some pairs to perform their dialogues for the class.

- bird (n): (picture) - fly (v): (picture) - poster (n): (picture) - eat (v): (picture)

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to focus on the pictures and uses them to teach bird, fly, poster and eat. - Students work in pairs to find the differences and write sentences about picture B. (With stronger classes, teacher could do this as a race.) - Teacher asks some students to read their sentences to the class.

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the present continuous. ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ sentences ❖ Organization: - Students can write their sentences individually and compare with another fast finisher. - Teacher asks students to read their sentences to the class.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all structures. -Prepare the next lesson

(Students’ own answers.)

 Finish? Write affirmative and negative sentences using the present continuous about you and other people in the class.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening Verbs: Studying a language

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - listen to interviews about learning a language. - develop students’ listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand the situation and lead in new lesson ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads the questions with the class and elicits responses from individual students: ? “Do you like learning languages? Look at the things in the box. What things do you like and dislike?” - Students answer in their own. - Teacher asks more questions to encourage longer answers, for example: ? “Which things do you find most difficult? Which are the most useful? Why do you like (listening)?”

 THINK! Do you like learning languages? Look at the things in the box. What things do you like and dislike?

(Students’ own answers.)


L

FI CI A OF Suggested answers 1. e 2. h 3. d 6. i 7. j 8. b

4. c 9. f

5. a 10. g

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-listening Exercise 2: - Students work in pairs to ask and answer the questions in the quiz and check their scores in the key at the bottom of the pictures. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class their scores.

1. Look at the quiz. Check the meanings of the verbs in blue. Match questions 1–10 to pictures a–j. Then listen and check.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the vocabularies to do a quiz. ❖ Contents: Students work individual/pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Pre-listening Exercise 1: - Students can use their dictionaries to check the meanings of the verbs in blue, then read the quiz and match the questions to the pictures. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this activity.) - Teacher plays the audio for students to check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class and that students understand all the verbs.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher reads the introduction with the class and focuses on the languages in the box. Elicit that Kanji is a Japanese language. - Teacher asks students which language each person is learning: ? “What are the people learning?”

2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions in exercise 1. Then check your scores in the key. (Students’ own answers.)

3. Read the introduction. Then listen to the interviews. What are the people learning? Use the languages in the box.


FI CI A

Suggested answers 1. English 2. Russian and Arabic 3. Kanji

OF

4. Listen again and answer the questions for Mario, Mark and Hannah.

ƠN

Suggested answers 1. - Mario is watching TV. - Mark is checking new vocabulary on the internet. - Hannah is revising for her exams. 2. - Mario thinks listening is difficult. - Mark thinks reading and writing are difficult. - Hannah thinks pronunciation is difficult.

QU Y

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads the questions: ? “What is he / she doing now? What does he / she think is difficult?” - Teacher points out that in this exercise students must concentrate on who is speaking to hear the answers for each person. - Students prepare to listen. - Teacher plays the audio again. - Students listen and answer the questions. (With weaker classes, teacher plays the audio once for students to answer the first question, then play it again for them to answer the second question.) - Teacher checks answers with the class. - Teacher asks students to read aloud the Study Strategy.

L

- Students listen to the introduction carefully and prepare to listen to the audio. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and answer the question. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

M

Optional activity: Listening - Teachers writes these questions on the board - Students work in pairs and discuss the answers to the questions. - Teacher plays the audio again for them to check their answers.

 Optional activity: Listening 1. Why is Mario watching TV? 2. Why are Mark and Peter learning languages? 3. Who is teaching Hannah? Suggested answers 1. Because it is good for his English. 2. Because a lot of people from different countries come to London. 3. A teacher from Japan.

DẠ

Y

Post-listening 5. Read the Study Strategy. Then make a table Exercise 5: with your answers in exercise 2. What good - Teacher reads the Study Strategy with the and bad learning strategies have you got? class then reads out the examples in the table. - Teacher asks students to brainstorm some more ideas for learning with the whole class and make notes on the board, for example: listen to music, read things online, use social


FI CI A

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare the answers in your table in exercise 5.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

(Students’ own answers.)

OF

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Students compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class about their partner’s good strategies.

L

media in English, learn vocabulary after class, review notes regularly. - Students make a table using their answers from exercise 2.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

(Students’ own answers.)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 5: Language focus • Present continuous: questions • Present continuous and present simple

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask people about their routines and what they’re doing now. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students identify the present simple and the present continuous. ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: -Teacher asks students close their books, and asks students what they can remember about Mario from the listening: ? “What does he do as his job? (He plays football.) What’s he doing now? (He’s watching TV.).” - Students answer the questions - Teacher writes the two questions and answers on the board and asks: ? Which is the present continuous? Which is the present simple?

Brainstorm Example: 1. What does he do as his job? the present -> He plays football. simple 2. What’s he doing now? the present -> He’s watching TV. continuous


OF

FI CI A

L

Which one asks about what’s happening now? (The present continuous).” - Teacher leads in the lesson ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand how to use the present simple and the present continuous. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the structures and work individual. 1. Look at the sentences. What are the he / she ❖ Products: Students understand the and they forms of each question and answer? structures.

QU Y

ƠN

NH

❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to read out the questions and answers, then elicits the question form of the present continuous. - Students pay attention to the structure and copy down.

 GRAMMAR. PRESENT CONTINUOUS: QUESTIONS 1. Are you learning English? Yes, I am. 2. What are you doing now? I’m watching TV. 3. Are you learning the same language? No, we aren’t.

 (?) Is/Am/Are + S + V-ing …? Yes, S + is/am/are No, S + isn’t/am not/aren’t

 (?) Wh-Qs + is/am/are + S + V-ing …? S + is/am/are + V-ing S + isn’t/am not/aren’t + V-ing

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions they have learnt to do the tasks given. with words from the columns and the verbs in ❖ Contents: Students work in individual the box. Use the present continuous. /pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Teacher elicits a few more example questions. - Students ask and answer questions in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to report back on their partner. (Students’ own answers.)


 GRAMMAR. PRESENT CONTINUOUS AND PRESENT SIMPLE

OF

Suggested answers - Present simple: 3, 5 - Present continuous: 4, 6 a) sometimes, usually, always (often, never, every day) b) today, at the moment, now (right now)

ƠN

Exercise 3: - Students complete the table with the sentences. - Teacher checks answers and elicits which time expressions we use with each tense. Elicit other possible time expressions for each tense (see answers in brackets below). Play the grammar animation. - Students listen and remember

FI CI A

L

3. Complete the table with sentences 3–6. Which time expressions do we use with a) the present simple, and b) the present continuous?

NH

4. Look at the photos and complete the sentences. Use the present simple or the present continuous.

QU Y

Exercise 4: - Students complete the sentences then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

3. plays 6. speaks

5. USE IT! Work in groups. Imagine that one of you is a lottery winner. Ask and answer questions about now and usually. Use the present simple and the present continuous forms of the verbs in the box.

DẠ

Y

M

Exercise 5: - Teacher elicits a few example questions and answers. (With weaker classes, allow students time to prepare all their questions, working in pairs.) - Students then ask and answer in pairs. They swap roles and practise again.

Suggested answers 1. practises 2. ’s relaxing 4. ’s playing 5. ’s chatting

(Students’ own answers.)


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

L

FI CI A

NH

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart the structures. -Do exercises ( in workbook ) -Prepare for next lesson – Speaking

 Finish? Find three more photos from this book. Write questions and answers about them using the present continuous.

OF

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way the use question with “How…?” ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ questions ❖ Organization: - Students can write their questions individually, then ask and answer them with another fast finisher. - Teacher asks fast finishers to read their questions to the class, giving a page number for each question. Other students race to give the correct answers.


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD Lesson 6: Speaking

FI CI A

Asking for help when you’re studying

L

Week : Period:

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask for help when they are studying languages. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm and lead in new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers  THINK! What can you do if you can’t ❖ Organization: remember a word in English? - Teacher reads the question with the class and elicits answers from individual students. - Students answer on their own. - Teacher asks more questions to encourage students to say more, for example: (Students’ own answers.) ? “ Where can you get help? Who can you ask?”

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students open mind about the situation they may have in the lesson ❖ Contents: Students set up the situation


FI CI A

L

1. Complete the dialogue with the Key Phrases. Then watch or listen and check. What word can’t Zac remember?

OF

Suggested answers 1. Can you help me with something, please? 2. How do you say 3. Can you say that again, please? 4. How do you spell that? The word Zac can’t remember is “tomorrow”.

ƠN

❖ Products: Students’ opinion ❖ Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher allows students time to read through the gapped dialogue and the key phrases. - Students read the dialogue quickly, they can use dictionary to check the words which they don’t understand. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and complete the dialogue with the key phrases. - Students work individual. - Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to check their answers. Then, teacher checks answers with the class.

QU Y

NH

Optional activity: Speaking - Teacher plays the audio or video again, pausing after each of the key phrases. Ask  Optional activity: Speaking students to repeat the key phrases and encourage them to copy the intonation on the recording. - Students follow to the teacher’s guide.

 PRONUNCIATION: The alphabet 2. Complete the table with the letters in the box. Then listen and check.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students understand the way of asking for help when they are studying languages as well as develop speaking skill. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization While-speaking Exercise 2: - Teacher models the sounds in the table and reads out the letters that are already added. - Students complete the table with the letters from the box. - Teacher plays the audio for students to listen and check. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers 1. J 2. E 3. G 6. X 7. I 8. U

4. V

5. N


OF

FI CI A

L

Exercise 3: - Teacher says the alphabet through once as a 3. Say the alphabet. Then work in pairs. Ask class then asks students to stand up. Starting your partner to spell words from units 1–3. at the front of the class, get students to say a letter of the alphabet in turn, going round the class. If a student makes a mistake or can’t think of the next letter, he/she sits down. (Students’ own answers.) Continue, gradually speeding up, until only one or two students remain standing. - Teacher allows students time to prepare four or five words from units 1–3 to test their partner. - Students work in pairs to test each other. See who spelled all their partner’s words correctly.  PRONUNCIATION: Consonant clusters 4. Indicate the word whose bold part differs from the other three in pronunciation.

Post-speaking Exercise 5: - Students read the skills strategy before doing exercise 5. - Students work in pairs to prepare a new dialogue. Students swap roles and practise again. - Teacher asks some students to perform their dialogues for the class.

5. USE IT! Read the Skills Strategy and then work in pairs. Prepare a new dialogue using the chart below to help you. Practise the new dialogue. One of you is A, the other is B. Then change roles.

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to read the introduction. Model pronunciation of sword, where the letter w is silent. Make students pay attention to the fact that in English some consonant clusters may be spelled similarly but pronounced differently. - Students pay attention to the teacher.

M

QU Y

NH

Suggested answers 1. c 2. b 3. c

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to spell name. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization:

4. a

5. d


FI CI A

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

L

- For more speaking practice, teacher asks students to choose a well-known city, country or celebrity. - Teacher tells students they are going to spell the name for their partner, and their partner must write it down. - Students work in pairs to dictate the names. - Teacher sees who managed to write the names correctly.

(Students’ own answers.)

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Game SPELL THE NAME


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 7: Writing An email about your school

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write an informal email about their school. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks the question to the class and elicits answers from individual students: ? “What do you know about schools in other countries?” - Students answer on their own. - Teacher encourages students to share their knowledge with the class and asks more questions to encourage them to speak more: ? “How are things different in … ? Do you think this is a good idea? Why? / Why not?”

 THINK! What do you know about schools in other countries? (Students’ own answers.)


FI CI A

ƠN

OF

1. Read the email. How many students are there in Danny's school? Is Danny’s school very different from your school?

Suggested answers There are about 500 students. (Students’ own answers.)

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students have an idea of writing an informal email about their school. ❖ Contents: Students work individual to check the meaning of given words ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of given words ❖ Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: - Teacher gives questions: ? “How many students are there in Danny's school? Is Danny’s school very different from your school?” - Students read the email and answer the questions. Students compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class and discusses with the class how Danny’s school is similar and different to the students’ own school.

L

(Teacher could use the background information on page T61 to help stimulate discussion.)

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help student how to write an informal email about their school as well as develop writing skill. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-writing Exercise 2: - Students read the email again and complete the key phrases. - Teacher checks answers with the class and checks that students understand all the key phrases.

2. Complete the Key Phrases with words in the email.

Suggested answers 1. happy, you can study here next month 2. medium-sized 3. maths and English 4. optional 5. photo, my classmates 6. a photo of yours  LANGUAGE POINT: SO


3. Study the examples. Then match 1–4 with a–d and write sentences with “so”.

ƠN

OF

Suggested answers 1-c. I’m learning some Spanish words, so I need a dictionary. 2-d. I’ve got two bikes, so you can use one of them. 3-b. There’s a history exam tomorrow, so I’m revising now. 4-a. There aren’t any classes this afternoon, so we can go and play football.  Optional activity: Writing Suggested answers I’m, Here’s, It’s

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 3: - Teacher reads out the examples and asks students to translate them into their language. - Students follow to the teacher’s guide. - Teacher checks that they understand so. - Students match the sentence halves and write sentences with so, then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Point out that we usually use a comma before so. Optional activity: Writing - Teacher gives questions: ? “How does Danny begin and end his email?” - Students read the email quickly and answer the question. - Teacher elicits that he begins it with Hi, and ends with Write soon. Elicit other possible ways of ending an email, for example: Hope to hear from you soon, Looking forward to hearing from you, See you soon. - Teacher elicits that the tone of Danny’s email is quite informal, and tell students that in informal language we use more contractions (I’m, it’s, etc.). Ask students to find examples of contractions in Danny’s email. Check answers and encourage students to use contractions when they write their email.

FI CI A

L

SO là liên từ chỉ kết quả, mang ý nghĩa là “vì thế, vì vậy, cho nên”. Mệnh đề bắt đầu bằng SO là mệnh đề chỉ kết quả, SO thường đứng ở giữa câu và không bị ngăn cách bởi dấu phẩy. Example: I like languages, so I study French.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to write an informal email about their school. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups ❖ Products: Students’ writing ❖ Organization:

4. USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing guide


FI CI A

L DẠ

Y

M

ƠN NH

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

OF

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads the task with the class. - Students answer the questions and plan their email. - Teacher reads through the paragraph structure with the class. - Students write their email. - Teacher reminds students to check their grammar and spelling carefully. (This can be set for homework.)

(Students’ own answers.)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 8: CULTURE Digital learning

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - discuss the positive and negative things about digital learning. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Brainstorm ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students work individual to draw picture as requested while others will guess what picture is ❖ Products: Students’ drawing and guessing ❖ Organization: (Students’ own answers.) -Teacher asks students to close their book and asks them what they know about schools in their country: ? “What different types of school are there? How much time do you spend at school each week?” - Students answer on their own. - Teacher writes the words “digital learning” on the board and asks students what they think it means:


M

QU Y

L FI CI A OF ƠN

NH

? “Who can tell me the meaning of this phrase?” or “ Can you guess the meaning of this phrase?” - Teacher elicits some ideas, but do not accept or reject any at this stage. Tell students they are going to learn about digital learning. - Teacher gives some backgrounds about digital learning “Digital learning is more than just providing students with a laptop or a smart phone. It requires a combination of technology, digital content and instruction. It is also known as “learning facilitated by technology that gives students some element of control over time, place, path and/or pace.” Learning is not limited to the school days, to the teachers only or within the walls of a classroom. Students in a digital learning classroom will enjoy a combination of a wide spectrum of practices including lively lessons on TV channels, mobile learning, virtual reality, blended learning, and/or softwares. Moreover, interactive and adaptive software allows students to learn in their own style and at their own pace, making learning personal. Digital learning is suitable for professional athletes, singers or soldiers … who are often absent from school. It is very useful during the time of a pandemic or other natural disasters. However, digital learning should not be the key method because it only brings knowledge to learners but lacks skills.”

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students have an idea about digital learning. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization:


ƠN

Suggested answers 1. He’s at home.

2. He’s studying.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students talk about the positive and negative things about digital learning. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Students read the text and check their sentences in exercise 1. - Teacher asks whose sentences were accurate.

OF

FI CI A

L

Exercise 1: 1. Look at the first photo and answer the - Teacher asks students to look at the picture questions. Then read the text and check your and asks: answers. ? “Where is Ben? What is he doing?” - Students work in pairs to answer the questions. - Teacher elicits a few possible answers. - Students then read the text and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher gives the questions and asks students to work in pairs: ? “At what age do children usually start school in your country? At what age can you leave school? Can children in your country do online courses?” - Students answer the questions. They can

2. Read and listen to the text and answer the questions. Suggested answers 1. He is sometimes absent from school because he’s a tennis player and needs time to practise and play in tournaments. 2. Digital learning helps him to keep studying. 3. Yes, he does. He still goes to school when there is no tournament. 4. Yes, he can do the tests easily. 5. Students’ own answers. 3. YOUR CULTURE Answer the questions. (Students’ own answers.)


FI CI A

 Optional activity: Writing

OF

Optional activity: Writing - Teacher asks students to imagine they are busy as an athlete and they have to learn at home. Ask them to prepare their ideal weekly timetable. Tell them their timetable should include studying and also sports and social activities. - Students can compare their timetables in small groups and decide which one they would most like to follow.

L

compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to talk about the different animal groups ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to ask and answer about animals ❖ Products: Students’ conversation ❖ Organization: - Teacher lets student brainstorm a few 4. USE IT! Work in groups. Discuss the topic: positive and negative things about digital Is digital learning useful? Why? Follow the learning, then gives example: You can still instructions. follow the lessons when you are busy but you cannot understand the lessons as fully as you are at school. Besides, you can’t play in school teams or go on school trips. - Teacher puts students into pairs to prepare their ideas. Read through the expressions in the box with the class and check that students understand everything. Put pairs together (Students’ own answers.) into groups to discuss their ideas. Ask groups in turn to tell the class if they think that digital learning is a good or bad idea overall. - Students follow teacher’s guide.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Write a few sentences about insects - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 9: Options Puzzles and games

L

UNIT 4: LEARNING WORLD

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all lessons in Unit 4. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents Game: FINDING CODE 1. Use the code to write the school subjects. Then put the subjects in order from your favourite (1) to your least favourite (10).

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students warm-up and lead in the new lesson ❖ Contents: Students work groups to play the game ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher divides students into two groups and asks them to use the code to write the subjects, then put them in order from favourite to least favourite. - Students work in groups. - Teacher checks answers with the class and puts students into pairs to compare their lists. - Teacher discusses as a class which subjects students generally like and dislike and why. - As an extension, students could work in pairs and use the code to write five words

Suggested answers 1. maths 2. science

3. PE


L

6. ICT 9. Spanish

OF

FI CI A

2. ROCK, PAPER, SCISSORS. Work in pairs. Look at pictures 1–4 and play the game. The loser says two sentences about picture 4, one in the present continuous affirmative and one in the present continuous negative.

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students revise some vocabularies related to animals ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to complete the race ❖ Products: Students can write as many things as they can ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher uses the pictures to explain the game of “rock, paper, scissors”. Explain that scissors beat paper, paper beats rock and rock beats scissors. Demonstrate the activity with a confident student. Count to three and ask them to make the sign for rock (a fist), paper (a flat hand) or scissors (a scissor shape with your fingers). Do the same yourself and see who wins. The loser says two sentences about picture 4. - Teacher puts students into pairs to play the game. Monitor and help while they are playing, and note down any common errors to goover at the end. Finish by eliciting some correct present continuous sentences about the picture.

4. English 5. art 7. geography 8. history

ƠN

from a vocabulary set in a previous unit. They can swap puzzles with another pair and try to solve the puzzle they have been given.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE (Students’ own answers.) ❖ Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop skills 3. Look at the picture. Read the sentences and ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and write the names of the students in the picture. groups to do the tasks ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization Exercise 3: - Students work in pairs to read the sentences and write the names of the students. - Teacher could do this as a race. Check answers with the class.


L

3. Sally 6. Emma

FI CI A

Suggested answers (L–R): 1. Becky 2. John 4. Joe 5. Dan

Suggested answers

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 4: - Students find seven more verbs in the wordsearch. ( With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this, and could look back at page 46 for help. With stronger classes, they could do it as a race.) - Teacher checks answers with the class.

ƠN

OF

4. Find seven more verbs about studying a language.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have learnt ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ questions ❖ Organization:

5. MIME GAME. Work in groups of three. Write ten sentences on pieces of paper. Use the present continuous, for example, I’m having lunch. One student takes a piece of paper and mimes the sentence. The other students ask questions to guess the sentence. The first


OF

FI CI A

L

- Teacher brainstorms some ideas for student to guess the correct sentence mimes sentences with the class. Point out that the the next sentence. sentences must all be things that it is possible to mime. Put students into groups of three to write their sentences on individual pieces of paper. Monitor and help while they are working. - Students then put the pieces of paper in a pile face down on their desk. They take turns picking up a piece of paper and miming the action. Their teammates must make questions to guess the actions. See who has the most points at the end. (Students’ own answers.) - As a variation, groups could write their ten sentences and then swap sentences with another group to play the gam

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

PROGRESS REVIEW 3

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 5. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Check students’ understanding about the knowledge of Unit 5. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 1 to 7. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise the language they have studied in Unit 5. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 5. v Organization: - Teacher asks students to retell the knowledge I. Theory from Unit 5. 1. Vocabulary - Food. - Students answer. - Adjectives: Health.


2. Language focus - Some, any, much, many and a lot of - Countable and uncountable nouns

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

II. Exercises VOCABULARY: Food 1. Complete the words in the texts. Suggested answers 1. egg 2. bacon 3. juice 4. fruit 5. apple 6. salad 7. vegetables 8. cheese 9. burgers 10. chips

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner. - Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner. - Teachers check the answers again with class.

READING: Sumo style 2. Complete the text with the words. Suggested answers 1. enormous 2. train 3. dish 4. bowls 5. vitamins 6. desserts

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

- Teacher writes down on the board and explains again if necessary. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

LANGUAGE FOCUS: - Some, any, much, many and a lot of - Countable and uncountable nouns 3. Choose the correct words. Suggested answers 1. c - many 2. a - any 3. b - a lot of 4. b - much 5. a - any 6. a - some VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Adjectives: Health 4. Listen and draw lines from names 1–7 to people a–g in the picture.


5. b 6. f

ƠN

SPEAKING: In a café 6. Put the dialogue in the correct order. Number the sentences. Suggested answers a-3 b-8 c-1 d-4 e-7 f-6 g-9 h-2 i–5

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ evaluation v Organization: - Teacher summaries the lesson for students and ask students to evaluate their comprehesion by themselves. - Students do as directed. - Teacher asks students to show their evaluation in front of the class.

OF

FI CI A

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Verb + -ing 5. Write sentences using the verbs. Suggested answers 1. loves playing 2. hates getting up 3. like helping 4. don’t mind living 5. don’t like running 6. prefers eating 7. doesn’t like swimming 8. don’t mind doing

7. d

L

Suggested answers 1. a 2. e 3. c 4. g

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare new lesson.

WRITING: A food blog 7. Choose the correct words and complete the text. Suggested answers 1. c, First 2. b, tasty 3. c, After 4. a, to make 5. b, great 6. c, Finally 7. b, many 8. a, Enjoy


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

PROGRESS REVIEW 3 (Cont’)

L

Week : Period:

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 6. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Check students’ understanding about the knowledge of Unit 6. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 8 to 14. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

I. Theory ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE 1. Vocabulary FORMATION - Sports. v Aims: Revise the language they have - X games. studied in Unit 6. 2. Language focus v Contents: Students work in individual. - There was(n't), there were(n't) v Products: The knowledge they have - Was(n't), were(n't) studied in Unit 6. - Past simple: affirmative v Organization: - Past time expressions - Teacher asks students to retell the knowledge II. Exercises from Unit 6. VOCABULARY: Sports - Students answer. 8. Complete the words.


L

READING: The Olympics then and now 9. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words. Suggested answers 1. medallist 2. winner 3. spectator 4. competitor 5. swimmer

QU Y

- Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner.

Y

M

- Teachers check the answers again with class.

DẠ

LANGUAGE FOCUS: - There was(n't), there were(n't) - Was(n't), were(n't) 10. Complete the sentences with the words. Suggested answers 1. There weren’t 2. weren’t 3. was 4. There were 5. There was 6. were 7. There wasn’t 8. wasn’t

NH

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner.

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

Suggested answers 1. hockey 2. athletics 3. team 4. Olympic 5. cycling 6. championship 7. Skiing 8. football

FI CI A

- Teacher writes down into the board and explain again if necessary. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: - X games 11. Listen and write True or False Suggested answers 1. False 2. False 3. True 4. True 5. False 6. True LANGUAGE FOCUS:


ƠN

OF

SPEAKING: Last weekend 13. Complete the dialogue with the words. There are four extra words. Suggested answers 1. How 2. was 3. went 4. good 5. were 6. news 7. with 8. don’t 9. when

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ evaluation v Organization: - Teacher summaries the lesson for students and ask students to evaluate their comprehesion by themselves. - Students do as directed. - Teacher asks students to show their evaluation in front of the class.

FI CI A

L

- Past simple: affirmative - Past time expressions 12. Complete the sentences using the past simple form of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. watched 2. swam 3. travelled 4. became 5. scored 6. competed

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare new lesson.

WRITING: A sports star 14. Order the words to make sentences. Suggested answers 1. Andy Murray’s full name is Andrew Baron Murray. 2. He’s a tennis player from Scotland. 3. He was born on 15th May 1987. 4. Murray first competed in tennis matches when he was at school. 5. At the age of 17 he won the Junior US Open. 6. He won a gold medal at the Olympics. 7. He’s one of the most successful British tennis players.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

L

PROGRESS REVIEW 4

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 7. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Check students’ understanding about the knowledge of Unit 7. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 1 to 7. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise the language they have studied in Unit 7. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 7. v Organization: - Teacher asks students to retell the knowledge from Unit 7. - Students answer.

I. Theory 1. Vocabulary - Describing people. - Life events. 2. Language focus - Past simple tense:


+ affirmative + negative + questions

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

II. Exercises VOCABULARY: Describing people 1. Complete the words. Suggested answers 1. height; tall 2. curly; blonde 3. green; light 4. bald; black 5. overweight; slim 6. round; glasses

OF

FI CI A

L

- Teacher writes down on the board and explains again if necessary. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ƠN

NH

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner. - Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner. - Teachers check the answers again with class.

READING: Childhood photos 2. Complete the sentences using the past simple form of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. had 2. took 3. grew; changed 4. collected; made 5. gave LANGUAGE FOCUS: Past simple tense: affirmative and negative 3. Write affirmative and negative sentences using the past simple. Suggested answers 1. I saw a nice photo of you. 2. We didn’t enjoy that boring film. 3. She taught her grandmother about computers. 4. You ate a big pizza last night. 5. He didn’t read that old book. VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Life events 4. Listen and choose the correct answers. Suggested answers 1. b, south 2. c, oldest 3. c, chocolate 4. b, an artist 5. c, 1997


FI CI A

L

LANGUAGE FOCUS: Past simple tense: questions 5. Complete the questions using the words. Suggested answers 1. did you eat 2. Did you revise 3. Did Anna play 4. did your friends watch 5. did your sister go 6. Did you listen

QU Y

OF

ƠN

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ evaluation v Organization: - Teacher summaries the lesson for students and ask students to evaluate their comprehesion by themselves. - Students do as directed. - Teacher asks students to show their evaluation in front of the class.

SPEAKING: Role-play: an interview with a famous person 6. Read the dialogue and choose the best answer. Write a letter (A–H) for each answer. There are two extra answers. Suggested answers 1. C, I’ve got a few questions for you, if that’s OK. 2. G, Sure. Go ahead. 3. A, Good question! 4. D, One more question. 5. H, That’s a difficult one. 6. F, Thanks for your time.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare new lesson.

WRITING: Description of a person 7. Complete the questions and answers with the words. Suggested answers 1. life 2. tall 3. eyes 4. exactly 5. grow 6. grew 7. become 8. singing 9. big 10. well 11. key 12. won 13. anything 14. Apparently


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

PROGRESS REVIEW 4 (Cont’)

L

Week : Period:

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the language they have studied from Unit 8. 2. Skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: textbook, lesson plan, TV 2. Students: students books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: During the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP v Aims: Check students’ understanding about the knowledge of Unit 8. v Contents: Students do the exercises individually. v Products: Students’ answer. v Organization: - Teacher allows students have time to do the exercises from 8 to 15. - Students do the task individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION v Aims: Revise the language they have studied in Unit 8. v Contents: Students work in individual. v Products: The knowledge they have studied in Unit 8. v Organization: - Teacher asks students to retell the knowledge from Unit 8. - Students answer.

I. Theory 1. Vocabulary - Means of transport. - Weather conditions. 2. Language focus - Be going to: af f irmative, negative and questions. - Will and won’t - First conditional.


FI CI A

II. Exercises VOCABULARY: Means of transport 8. Read the clue and write the object. Suggested answers 1. taxi 2. ferry 3. cable car 4. helicopter 5. bicycle 6. spaceship 7. truck

QU Y

- Students share their thinking and check the answers with their partner.

Y

M

- Teachers check the answers again with class.

DẠ

READING: Summer holidays 9. Choose the correct words. Suggested answers 1. awesome 2. boring 3. magnificent 4. new 5. cool 6. expensive

NH

- Teacher asks students to exchange the answers with partner.

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE v Aims: Help students understand their knowledge deeply. v Contents: Students work in pairs. v Products: v Organization:

L

- Teacher writes down into the board and explain again if necessary. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

LANGUAGE FOCUS: - Be going to: af f irmative, negative and questions - Will and won’t 10. Complete the sentences using the correct form of be going to and the verb. Suggested answers 1. ’m going to see 2. are going to travel 3. isn’t going to take 4. Are you going to buy 11. Complete the sentences using the correct form of will and one of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. ’ll need 2. won’t be 3. Will … tell 4. will … eat


ƠN

OF

LANGUAGE FOCUS: First conditional 13. Complete the first conditional sentences with the correct form of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. see; ‘ll invite 2. won’t be; are 3. has; ‘ll come 4. will you do; miss

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION v Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. v Contents: Students work in individually. v Products: Students’ evaluation v Organization: - Teacher summaries the lesson for students and ask students to evaluate their comprehesion by themselves. - Students do as directed. - Teacher asks students to show their evaluation in front of the class.

FI CI A

L

VOCABULARY AND LISTENING: Weather conditions 12. Listen and match the places 1–6 with pictures a–f. Suggested answers 1-c 2-e 3-d 4-b 5-a 6-f

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Prepare for the end of term 2 examination.

SPEAKING: Offers and promises 14. Choose the correct words and write them on the lines. Suggested answers 1. c, can 2. b, make 3. a, ’ll ask 4. b, see 5. c, drive 6, b, ’ll be WRITING: A postcard 15. Read the postcard and complete the text. Write one word on each line. Suggested answers 1. won’t / doesn’t 2. shopping 3. weather 4. going 5. Hope


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5: FOOD AND HEALTH

FI CI A

Food

L

Lesson 1: Vocabulary

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the food they like and dislike. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussio n group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students think about types of food and name them in 30 seconds. ❖ Products: Lists of foods. ❖ Organization: - Teacher puts students into pairs and give them 30 seconds to write down as many words for food as they can. Bring students’ ideas together on the board and check that they understand all the words. See which pair wrote the most correct words.  THINK! How many types of food can you - Students work in pairs to do the task. name in 30 seconds? (Students’ own answers) ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION 1. Look at the photos in School food. Choose ❖ Aims: To presents, practice and the correct words in the texts. Listen and consolidate new words related to food. check your answers. ❖ Contents: Suggested answers - Students choose the correct words. 1. sandwich 2. apple 3. juice


4. meat 7. beans 10. sweets 13. egg 16. pasta 19. soup

6. chips 9. rice 12. fizzy drinks 15. bread 18. water

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students complete the word web with words in exercise 1. - Students practice to pronounce short and long vowels /ɪ/ and /iː/ - Students watch/listen to the tap, then answer the question and complete the key phrase. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2:

2. Read the Study Strategy. Then copy and complete the word web with words in exercise 1. Think of more words to add to the web.

FI CI A

5. rice 8. vegetables 11. nuts 14. salad 17. chicken

L

- Students listen and repeat new words. ❖ Products: Students can remember, understand and use the new words. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the introduction and ask students which lunches they like best. Ask more questions to encourage students to say more, (e.g. Do you have this kind of food at your school? Do you sometimes eat outside at your school? Do you have vending machines like this at your school?) - Students read the texts and choose the correct words. They can use their dictionaries to check the different foods, if necessary. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs to do this. With stronger classes, you could do it as a race). - Teacher plays the audio for students to listen and check. Check that students understand all the foods and drill pronunciation of difficult words such as vegetables and chips. Point out the word tasty in the text on Australia and elicit or teach a few more words to describe food, (e.g. nice, horrible, disgusting). - Students could then discuss in pairs which meal they would most like to eat and why. - Teacher asks some pairs to report back to the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

 New words - sandwich (n) (pic.) - juice (n) (pic.) - meat (n) (pic.) - rice (n) (pic.) - chips (n) (pic.) - beans (n) (pic.) - vegetables (n) (pic.) - sweets (n) (pic.) - nuts (n) (pic.) - fizzy drinks (n) (pic.) - salad (n) (pic.) - bread (n) (pic.) - pasta (n) (pic.) - chicken (n) (pic.) - water (n) (pic.) - soup (n) (pic.) - nice (a) (expl.) - horrible (a) (expl.) - disgusting (a) (expl.)


L

FI CI A

Suggested answers: vegetables: chips, salad, beans fruit: apple snacks: nuts, crisps, sweets drinks: water, fizzy drinks, juice meat: chicken

OF

3. Listen and repeat the words. Then listen to six more words and complete the table.  Pronunciation Short and long vowels /ɪ/ and /iː/

ƠN

Suggested answers /ɪ/ fish, fizzy, chicken, drink, chips /iː/ beans, meat, cheese, eat, meal

4. Watch or listen. What food do the students like? Suggested answers The students like chicken salad, fish and chips, burgers (with cheese) and vegetable soup.

5. Watch or listen again and complete the Key Phrases with examples that the students talk about.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

- Teacher reads the study strategy with the class then put students into pairs to copy and complete the word web. Draw the word web on the board and bring students’ ideas together on the board. Elicit more words to add. Encourage students to add more words to their own word web as they continue working through this unit. - Students do the task in pairs. Exercise 3: - Teacher plays the audio of the first four words for students to listen, then play it again, pausing after each word for students to repeat. - Students listen and repeat the words. - Teacher plays the next six words for students to listen and add them to the table. - Students complete the table. - Teacher check answers then play the audio again, pausing after each word for students to repeat. Exercise 4: - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and note down each student’s favourite food. - Students do the task in pairs. - Teacher plays the video or audio again, if necessary, for students to check and complete their answers. Check answers with the class. Ask students which of the speakers they agree with. Exercise 5: - Teacher allows students time to read through the gapped key phrases. Play the video or audio again for students to watch or listen and complete the key phrases with examples that the students talk about. - Students watch/listen to the tap again then complete the Key phrase individually. - Teacher check answers and check that students understand all the key phrases. (With stronger classes, use the video or audio to teach delicious, and encourage students to use this word and other adjectives to describe

Suggested answers 1. fish and chips 2. chicken salad 3. pasta 4. many school meals 5. chicken


food when they talk about food in the next exercise.)

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

6. USE IT! Work in groups. Ask and answer questions using the Key Phrases and the words in the box. (Students’ own answers)

Finished? Invent a perfect school lunch and a horrible school lunch. (Students’ own answers)

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can talk about the food they like and dislike. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to ask and answer questions using the Key phrases. ❖ Products: Student’s talking. ❖ Organization: Exercise 6: - Teacher asks a confident student one or two questions like the example, using the foods in the box. Elicit a range of answers. Use the Jigsaw technique, put students into groups to ask and answer questions. - Students do the task following the Jigsaw technique. * Finished? - Teacher refers fast finishers to the Finished? activity. - Students can write their ideas individually and compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks them to tell the class. Ask other students if they agree with the ideas for a perfect and horrible school lunch.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.36). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5: FOOD AND HEALTH

L

Lesson 2: Reading

FI CI A

Sumo wrestlers

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - summarise a text. - develop students’ reading skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! Look at the photo. What do you ❖ Aims: Students can predict the content of know about sumo wrestlers? a text. ❖ Contents: Students work individually. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads the question with the class and brainstorm what students know about sumo wrestlers. Refer them to the photo to help them. - Students answer the question, then share the answer with their partner. - Teacher checks the answer with class. Then, give them more information about Sumo wrestling. * Back ground Sumo wrestling originated in Japan. Wrestlers win a fight by forcing their ( Students’ own answers ) opponent to step outside the ring, or forcing


FI CI A

ƠN

OF

 New words - typical (a) (expl.) - healthy (a) (expl.)

1. Read the text. Complete the interview with questions a–d. Suggested answers 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b  Skill strategy

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to family. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. ❖ Products: Students can remember, understand and use the new words. ❖ Organization: Pre-reading -Teacher introduces some new words “Before reading, there are some new words in the text.” - Teacher uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. Exercise 1: - Teacher explains that the text is an interview about sumo wrestling. Point out the questions already in the text and the gaps for further questions. Allow students time to read through questions a–d. Check they understand the new words. - Students read and complete the interview with the questions. They can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. - Teacher has students open their books to page 64. - Teacher asks students to read the Skills strategy before doing exercise. Point out that a summary focuses on the general idea of a text, not the details.

L

them to touch the ground with any part of their body apart from their bottom or feet.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop reading skill.

2. Read the Skills Strategy. Then listen to the text again and complete the summary with five of the words in the box.


Suggested answers 1. isn’t 2. healthy 3. eat 4. afternoons 5. after

Exercise 3: - Teacher has students use a dictionary to check the meanings of the words in blue in the text. Discuss the meanings with the class. Teacher could ask students to translate the words into their own language to check understanding. - Students do as directed. Optional activity - Teacher write the following gapped sentences on the board: 1. ....... are good for you. 2. Sports people usually ...... every day. 3. Spaghetti bolognese is a popular ..... in Italy. 4. You have ....... at the end of a meal. 5. You put rice or soup in a ........ - Students complete the sentences with the correct blue words from the text. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

3. Use a dictionary to check the meanings of the words in blue in the text.  Vocabulary plus - train (v) huấn luyện - dish (n) món ăn - vitamins (n) vitamin - enormous (a) khổng lồ - bowls (n) tô - desserts (n) món tráng miệng

FI CI A

ƠN

OF

Optional activity. Suggested answers 1. False (Only the heaviest sumo wrestlers weigh 190 kilos.) 2. True 3. False (They don’t have breakfast.) 4. False (There isn’t much fat in chankonabe.) 5. True

NH

QU Y

M

Y

DẠ

L

❖ Contents: Students work individual/ pairs/ groups. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-reading Exercise 2: - Students read and listen to the text and complete the summary with the correct words. They can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Optional activity - Teacher writes these sentences on the board: 1. Most sumo wrestlers weigh 190 kilos. 2. Sumo wrestlers start training early in the morning. 3. They have a big breakfast. 4. There’s a lot of fat in chankonabe. 5. They sometimes eat sweet foods. - Students work in pairs to decide if the sentences are true or false, and correct the false sentences. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Optional activity Suggested answers 1. Vitamins 2. train 3. dish 4. desserts 5. bowl


NH

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.40). - Prepare new lesson.

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate the lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. ❖ Products: Students’ comprehension. ❖ Organization: Post-reading Exercise 4: 4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Do you think a - Teacher allows students time to prepare sumo wrestler’s life is interesting? Why / Why their answers to the questions individually. not? What is your favourite dish? They then discuss the questions in pairs. - Students do the task. ( Students’ own answers ) - Teacher asks some students to report back to the class. Discuss as a class what students’ favourite dishes are. Ask more questions to extend the discussion, (e.g. What’s your favourite meat / fish dish? What’s your favourite dessert? How do you make it?) See which dishes are the most popular with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5: FOOD AND HEALTH

FI CI A

• Countable and uncountable nouns • some, any, much, many and a lot of

L

Lesson 3: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about food and meals. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents Chant: What do you like?

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Students know some words are countable nouns and some are uncountable. ❖ Contents: Students work in individually. ❖ Products: Countable and uncountable nouns. ❖ Organization: - Teacher ask students to watch/listen and chant along the video tap about foods. - Students work in two teams to chant along. - Teacher ask students what kinds of food they like. Elicit some words from the video tap and write them on the board, (e.g. bread, chips, meat, vegetables). - Students answer. - Teacher points out that some words are in the singular and some are plural. Elicit or explain that some are countable nouns and some are uncountable.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NefcvGMqcyU

T: What kinds of food do you like? Sts: - bread - chips - meat - vegetables - ........


 Language point COUNTABLE AND UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS Nouns can be countable or uncountable. - Countable nouns can be counted. Example: an apple, two apples, three apples, etc. - Uncountable nouns cannot be counted. Example: air, rice, water, etc.

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students find the Rules 1 – 2. - Students look at the pictures and complete the sentences. - Students choose the correct words in Rules 1 – 3. - Students complete questions 1–5 with much and many. Then choose the correct words in the answers. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 1: - Students find the words in the texts and decide which are countable and which are uncountable. Students could work in pairs to do this. - Teacher check answers with the class, then read through the rules with the class and ask students to complete the rules with the correct words. - Students complete the rules individually. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

1. Find examples of the words below in the texts on pages 62 and 63. Which are countable (c) and which are uncountable (u)? Add the words to Rules 1–2. Suggested answers apple (c), juice (u), egg (c), bread (u), pasta (u), sweet (c), water (u), snack (c)

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students distinguish between the countable nouns and uncountable nouns. ❖ Contents: Students work individually. ❖ Products: Language point about countable and uncountable nouns. ❖ Organization: - Teacher explains the countable and uncountable nouns. Show students how to distinguish between them. - Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

DẠ

Exercise 2: - Students look at the pictures and complete the sentences with the words in the box.

Rules: 1. an egg / eggs, a sweet / sweets, a snack / snacks. 2. bread, pasta, water.  Language note - We can count countable nouns, but we cannot count uncountable nouns: one apple, two apples (NOT one bread, two breads). - If we want to count uncountable nouns, we have to use another word that we can count: two slices of bread, two glasses of water.

2. Look at the pictures and complete the sentences. Suggested answers 1. rice


FI CI A

OF

3. Look at the sentences in exercise 2 and choose the correct words in Rules 1–3. Suggested answers 1. much 2. many 3. negative

ƠN

Exercise 3: - Teacher has students choose the correct words to complete the rules. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher check answers with the class. Play the grammar animation. - Students watch the animation.

L

(With weaker classes, students could work in 2. cheese pairs for this activity.) 3. meat - Teacher checks answers with the class. 4. vegetables 5. pears 6. crisps

M

QU Y

NH

 Language note - Teacher show how to use quantifiers before - We use some in affirmative sentences and any nouns. in negative sentences and questions: - Students listen carefully and then copy Example: down into their notebooks. We’ve got some cheese. We haven’t got any cheese. Have we got any cheese? (NOT Have we got some cheese?) - We use much with uncountable nouns and many with countable nouns: Example: How many eggs? How much bread? (NOT How much eggs?)

DẠ

Y

Exercise 4: - Students complete the questions with the correct words. - Teacher checks answers with the class then ask students to choose the correct answers. - Students could work in pairs for this, or they could work individually and then compare their answers in pairs.

4. Complete questions 1–5 with much and many. Then choose the correct words in the answers. Suggested answers 1. much, any 2. many, many 3. much, a lot of 4. much, much 5. many, some


5. USE IT! What do you usually eat and drink every week? Complete the sentences. Then compare with other people in the class. Are they the same or different? 1. I eat some ......................... 2. I never eat any ......................... 3. I don’t eat many / much ......................... 4. I drink a lot of ......................... 5. I don’t drink much ......................... 6. I never drink any ........................

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.37). - Prepare new lesson.

Game: Food https://www.gamestolearnenglish.com/food/

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the language point. ❖ Contents: Students work in individual/pairs. ❖ Products: Students’ sentences. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher reads out some of the sentence beginnings and elicit some possible answers. - Students complete the sentences with their own ideas. - Teacher asks two students to read out the example dialogue. Point out the question What about you? to ask for information about someone else. - Students work in pairs to discuss their answers. They then swap and work with a new partner to compare again. - Teacher asks students to note down whose sentences are the same as theirs. * Finished - Teacher refers fast finishers to the Finished? activity. - Students can write their shopping lists individually and compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks students to read their shopping lists to the class. Write items on the board and brainstorm more ideas to add with the whole class.

ƠN

OF

(Students’ own answers)

M

QU Y

NH

Finished? You invite three friends for a celebration at your house. Write a shopping list for the food and drink you want to buy. (Students’ own answers)

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening

FI CI A

• Adjectives: Health

L

UNIT 5. FOOD AND HEALTH

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand specific information in interviews about health. - develop students’ listening skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game: Memory ❖ Aims: Introduce to students about some activities to be healthy or not. ❖ Contents: Students think – pair – share their ideas. ❖ Products: The list of some activities to be healthy. ❖ Organization: - Teacher divides class into 4 groups. Ask students to look at a picture about the activities in 30 seconds. Then, write down these activities as fast as possible in the small board and stick it on the board. - Students work in groups to do the task. - Teacher checks and declares the winner  THINK! What can you do if you want to be who wrote the most correct activities. Then, healthy? read out the question with the class. Ask students work in pairs to answer the question (Students’ own answer)


FI CI A

L

using the ideas in the game and their own ideas. - Teacher discusses as a class the best things to do in order to be healthy.

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box. Then complete the definitions with five of the words.  New words - active (a) - unhealthy (a) - unfit (a) - well (a) - hungry (a) - fit (a) - full (a) - tired (a) - lazy (a) - healthy (a) - ill (a)

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups

3. Work in pairs. Look at the Health quiz and choose the best answer a, b or c. Suggested answers 1. b 2. a

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents some adjectives related to health. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups then do the task to practice. ❖ Products: Students can understand, remember and use the new words. ❖ Organization: Pre-listening Exercise 1: - Teacher shows new words and uses some techniques of teaching vocabulary to teach them, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen to the teacher and repeat the words. - Students copy down these words into their notebooks. Then use their dictionaries to check the meanings of the words and complete the definitions. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs). - Teacher checks answers with the class and check that students understand the words in the sentences. Exercise 2: - Teacher reads out the example sentence from exercise 1 and point out the opposite adjective well. - Students work in pairs to find the remaining opposites in the box in exercise 1. - Teacher plays the audio for students to check their answers. Check that students understand all the adjectives.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

Suggested answers 1. active 2. hungry 3. healthy 4. fit 5. tired

2. What are the opposites of the adjectives in sentences 1–4 in exercise 1? Use the words in the box. Listen and check. Suggested answers 1. lazy 2. full 3. unhealthy 4. unfit


L FI CI A

OF

4. Read the Health check questionnaire and answer the questions.

5. Listen to three interviews. Which questions a–h in exercise 4 does each person answer? Suggested answers 1. Charlie: a, b, h, c 2. Conor: b 3. Fran: f, g, d

QU Y

NH

Exercise 6: - Teacher allows students time to read the questions. Point out that in this exercise students must listen carefully for specific information. Play the audio again. - Students listen and answer the questions. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

3. c 4. c 5. a 6. b

ƠN

❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-listening Exercise 3: - Students work in pairs to read the Health quiz and choose the best answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class and see who got the most correct answers Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to read the questions and prepare their answers individually. Do not check answers at this stage. - Students do as directed. Exercise 5: - Teacher reads out the questions then play the audio. - Students listen and note down which questions each person answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Optional activity Suggested answers 1. Fran 2. Conor 3. Charlie 4. Conor

DẠ

Y

M

Optional activity - Teacher writes these questions on the board. Who … 1. can run 41 kilometres? 2. isn’t very fit at the moment? 3. doesn’t like staying in bed? 4. sleeps for 6 or 7 hours? - Students work in pairs and discuss the answers to the questions from memory. - Teacher plays the audio again for them to check their answers.

6. Listen again and answer the questions. Suggested answers 1. Eight or nine hours 2. No, he isn’t. He likes going out and doing sport. 3. He’s studying for exams. 4. She runs and swims. 5. Healthy foods: pasta, chicken; Unhealthy foods: desserts and chocolate

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson.

7. USE IT! Work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions in the Health check questionnaire. Who is fitter and healthier?


❖ Contents: Students work in pairs. ❖ Products: Students’ talking. ❖ Organization: Post-listening Exercise 7: - Students work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. - Teacher discusses what students could do to become fitter and healthier.

FI CI A

L

(Students’ own answer )

Eating healthy nutritious food is the simple and right solution to get rid of excess body weight effortlessly and become slim and healthy forever. – Subodh Gupta –

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.38). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5. FOOD AND HEALTH

FI CI A

• Verb + -ing • Imperatives • should / shouldn't

L

Lesson 5: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about likes and dislikes and give advice/instructions. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game: Pelmanism ❖ Aims: Get students into the right mood for learning the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students play game “Pelmanism” ❖ Products: V-ing form. ❖ Organization: - Teacher shows students how to play the game. - A student lays cards face down in a grid and take turns flipping over two cards at a time looking for a match. If he/she find a match, he/she go again. If the cards are not a match, the player turns them back over and the next student goes. - Teacher declares the winner who finds the most matches. Then, teacher underlines the -ing forms from the game, and explain that in https://matchthememory.com/presentprogressive2


English some verbs are often followed by an ing form.

OF

FI CI A

L

1. Look at the examples. Then answer the questions in Rules 1–2. Suggested answers 1. the -ing form 2. running, sitting, swimming

 Language point VERBS OF LIKING

ƠN

like/prefer/dislike/ hate/ don’t mind... + V-ing

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand how to use the verbs of liking. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the examples then answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the examples, then read through the rules with the class and elicit the answers. - Students do the task in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Play the grammar animation.

QU Y

- Teacher explains the grammar to students. - Students copy down to their notebooks.

2. Think of two things that you love doing, two things that you don’t mind doing and three things that you hate doing. Write sentences and then compare in a group to find out about your friends’ likes and dislikes.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in individual/pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to write their sentences individually. - Students write. - Teacher put students into small groups to compare their sentences.

Suggested answers (Students’ own answer)


L

- Teacher reads out the examples of imperatives and ask students how to make them negative. - Students answer.

3. Look at the examples of imperatives. How do we make the negative form? Find examples in the Health quiz on page 66.  Language point THE NEGATIVE FORM OF IMPERATIVES

FI CI A

Exercise 3:

Do not/ Don’t + V_bare + ...... Suggested answers - Don’t eat. - Don’t go to bed late. - Don’t go to school.

Exercise 4:

4. Add more classroom rules with DOs and DON’Ts using imperatives.

NH

- Teacher checks the answers with the whole class and see who got the most correct answers.

ƠN

- Students use imperatives to write about the classroom rules (Dos and Don’ts).

OF

- Teacher elicit a few answers, then ask students to check in the quiz in exercise 3 on page 66.

M

QU Y

Exercise 5: - Teacher focuses on the first picture and elicit the answer. - Students complete the sentences with the correct imperative forms. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs). - Teacher checks answers with the class. (With stronger classes, ask students to write alternative sentences for some of the pictures)

(Students’ own answer)

5. Complete the sentences with the affirmative and negative imperative forms of the verbs in the box. Suggested answers 1. Eat 2. Visit 3. Don’t drink 4. Go 6. Look at the examples. Then choose the correct answers to complete the Rules.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 6: - Teacher read the example sentences to the class, or ask for a confident volunteer. Ask students to read the rules and choose the correct options. - Students answer. Suggested answers give advice, the same


7. Your friend wants to be healthy. Complete the advice using should / shouldn’t. Suggested answers 1. You shouldn’t stay up late. 2. You should eat fruit and vegetables. 3. You should do exercise. 4. You shouldn’t drink fizzy drinks. 5. You shouldn’t sit on the sofa all day.

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way the use comparative adjectives to compare things. ❖ Contents: Students work individual/pairs ❖ Products: Students’ comparison ❖ Organization: Exercise 8: Put students into small groups to compare their answers and decide which advice is best. Ask them to choose the two best pieces of advice for each situation. Ask groups in turn to report back and discuss as a class which is the best advice. - Teacher refer fast finishers to the Finished? activity. Students can write their rules individually then compare with another fast finisher. Alternatively, ask fast finishers to read their rules to the class. Write the rules on the board and elicit more from other students.

8. USE IT! Work in groups. Compare your advice in exercise 7. Who has got the best advice?

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

Exercise 7: - Teacher go through the example with the class and show how the prompts are expanded to make full sentences. Remind them to consider whether the prompt gives good or bad advice. - Students can work in pairs to complete the rest of the sentences.

QU Y

NH

(Students’ own answer)

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.39). - Prepare new lesson.

 Finish? Write five important rules for your class. Use imperative forms. (Students’ own answer)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5. FOOD AND HEALTH

L

Lesson 6: Speaking

FI CI A

• In a café

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - order food and drink in a café. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students get comfortable with classmates and focus their brains on content of the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students watch a video clip about the conversations between a waitress and some customers. And then answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher aske students to watch a video clip and then reads the questions with the class and elicit answers from individual students. Ask more questions to encourage students to say more, (e.g. Is the food nice? How much do you usually pay?) - Students do as directed. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=49QFHWIky-k)

 THINK! What is your favourite restaurant or café? What kind of food and drink do you usually eat there? (Students’ own answers) 1. Complete the menu with the words in the box. Which things on the menu do you like or dislike?


L

FI CI A

 New words - plain (adj) (expl.) - vegetarian options (n) (expl.) - mineral water (n) (item.) Suggested answers 1. cheese 2. chicken 3. chips 4. burger 5. juice

ƠN

OF

2. Listen and say the prices. 1. £4.50 four pounds fifty 2. £1.00 one pound 3. £1.20 one pound twenty 4. £4.95 four pounds ninety-five 5. £0.80 eighty pence 3. Read and say the prices. Listen and check.

Suggested answers 1. two pounds twenty-five 2. one euro 3 fifty cents 4. three dollars eighty-five 5. seven dollars twenty 6. ninety-nine pence

Y

M

QU Y

NH

❖ Aims: Help students pay attention to the content of the dialogue. ❖ Contents: Students work in individual/ pairs. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding. ❖ Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher presents some new words and check that students understand them. - Teacher asks students to read the menu and complete it with the words in the box. - Students work individually to do the task. - Teacher ask individual students which things they like and dislike on the menu. Exercise 2: - Teacher plays the audio once for students to listen. Play it again, pausing after each price for students to repeat. - Students repeat after the audio. - Teacher call outs some students to read out the price. Exercise 3: - Teacher reads through the glossary with the class. - Students work in pairs to read and say the prices. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Optional activity: - For more practice of prices, teacher divides the class into teams and write a selection of prices on the board. Teams take turns choosing a price to say. If they get it right, they get a point and the price is crossed off. If they make a mistake, they lose a point and the price remains on the board. Continue until all the prices have been crossed off. See which team has the most points.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students develop speaking skill in reading the price and the way to order food and drink in a café.

4. Read the dialogue, look at the menu and calculate the total price. Then watch or listen and check. Is Aaron’s meal very healthy? Suggested answers £2.50 + £1.20 + £1.80 = £5.50 His meal isn’t very healthy.


L FI CI A

ƠN

OF

5. Look at the dialogue and complete these Key Phrases. Then practise the dialogue with a partner. Use different items from the menu in exercise 1.

Suggested answers 1. Can 2. have a cheese sandwich 3. like salad or chips 4. Anything 5. have a cola 6. That’s £5.50

QU Y

NH

❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization While-speaking Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to read the dialogue, look at the menu and calculate the price. Elicit some possible answers, but do not confirm the answer at this stage. - Students do as directed. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to check. Discuss as a class if Aaron’s meal is healthy or unhealthy. Exercise 5: - Students look at the dialogue again and complete the key phrases. - Teacher check answers, and check that students understand all the key phrases. Put students into pairs to practise the dialogue using different items from the menu in exercise 1. - Students work in pairs to practise the dialogue. Optional activity: - Teacher plays the audio or video again, pausing after each of the key phrases. Get students to repeat the key phrases, and encourage them to copy the intonation on the recording. - Students do as required.

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Prepare and practise two dialogues using the Key Phrases and the situations below. Use the menu in exercise 1.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way to order food and drink in a café. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs. ❖ Products: Students’ conversation. ❖ Organization: Post-speaking Exercise 6: - Teacher puts students into pairs and tell them to swap roles after situation A. Allow students time individually to decide what they are going to order. - Students prepare and practise their dialogues.

(Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

- Teacher asks some students to perform their dialogues for the class. Optional activity: - For more speaking practice, get students to work in pairs and prepare their own menu, using different foods from pages 62 and 63. Monitor and help while they are working. Students can swap menus with another pair and practise ordering food again.

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the structures. - Do exercises (in workbook p.83). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5. FOOD AND HEALTH

FI CI A

Lesson 7: Writing

L

Week : Period:

• A food blog

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write a blog about food using sequencing words. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study. ❖ Contents: Students listen to the song “Burger Recipe Song”. Then answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher has students watch and listen to the song. And then, sing along the song. - Students do as directed. - Teacher asks the questions to the class and elicit answers from individual students. (https://youtu.be/zHzsY5c9fCk) Encourage students to share their experiences  THINK! Who cooks in your family? What with the class and ask more questions to do they usually cook? Do you like cooking? encourage them to speak more, (e.g. What things can you cook? What would you like to (Students’ own answers)


L

FI CI A

- red pepper (n) (pic.) - olives (n) (pic.)

OF

- ingredients (n) (pic.)

- chop (v) (pic.)

- starter (n) (expl.) - main course (n) (expl.) - dessert (n) (expl.) Suggested answers She has egg salads. Her favourite part of the meal is the dessert.

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students have an idea of writing a blog about food using sequencing words. ❖ Contents: Students work individual to check the meaning of given words. ❖ Products: Students can remember, understand, and use the given words. ❖ Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: - Students check the meanings of the words in their dictionaries. - Teacher models pronunciation of the words, if necessary. - Students work in pairs to read the blog and answer the questions, then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

1. Check the meanings of the words in the glossary. Then read Sally’s blog. What does she have for the starter? What is her favourite part of the meal?  New words - tuna (n) (pic.)

ƠN

cook? Do you think it’s important to learn how to cook?)

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help student how to write a blog about food using sequencing words as well as develop their writing skill. ❖ Contents: Students complete the Key Phrases, order pictures and complete the sentences. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization While-writing Exercise 2: - Students read the key phrases and complete them using words from Sally’s blog. - Teacher checks answers with the class and check that students understand all the key phrases. Exercise 3: - Teacher focuses attention on the words in blue in the blog. Discuss with the class what the words and phrases mean, and which two

2. Complete the Key Phrases with words from Sally's blog.

Suggested answers 1. Simple, great 2. yummy 3. meal 4. tomorrow 3. Look at the words and phrases in blue in the blog. Which two have the same meaning? Suggested answers Next and Then


L

FI CI A

OF

* Usage: Sequencers are used to: - Tell stories. - Give instructions - How to do something.

M

QU Y

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher focuses on the pictures and ask: What’s Sally making? (Vietnamese Spring Rolls). - Students answer the questions. - Teacher asks students to order the pictures and the sentences. Check the answers then ask students to complete the sentences with the correct ordering words. - Students do the task in pairs, then compare the answers with their partner. - Teacher checks the answers by asking students to read out the completed recipe in the correct order. Optional activity - Teacher asks students to close their books. Write the following gapped sentences on the board: 1. some fruit. 2. it with sugar. 3. with ice cream. - Teacher puts students into pairs to complete the sentences from memory. They can then check their answers in the blog. Elicit that the verbs are all imperatives, and point out that we use imperatives to give instructions about cooking food. Elicit some other possible imperatives for cooking instructions, (e.g. Add some sugar / salt, Stir for five minutes, Don’t cook for too long). -Teacher writes these on the board to help students when they write their blogs.

4. Order pictures and sentences a-d. Then complete the sentences with the words in exercise 3.  Language point SEQUENCING

ƠN

have the same meaning. Ask students to translate the words and phrases into their own language. Point out the commas after First, After that and Finally.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to write a blog about food using sequencing words. ❖ Contents: Students write a food blog. ❖ Products: Students’ blogs. ❖ Organization:

Suggested answers a. Then/ Next 2 b. First 1 c. Finally 4 d. Next/ Then 3 Optional activity 1. Chop 2. Cook 3. Serve

5. USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing guide. (Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

Exercise 5: - Teacher reads the task with the class. - Students answer the questions and plan their blog. - Teacher reviews Sally’s blog again with the class and point out that the sequencing words are used at the beginning of each paragraph. - Students write their blog. (This can be set for homework). Remind students to check their grammar and spelling carefully.

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook p.41). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5. FOOD AND HEALTH

FI CI A

• Science: Food and nutrients

L

Lesson 8: CLIL

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand a text and talk about nutrients. - develop students’ knowledge about science and their skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP GAME: Bingo! ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study. ❖ Contents: Students work individual. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher hands out one Bingo card to each student. Each Bingo card have six words about food. Each Bingo card will be different. Explain to the class that teacher’ll be calling out words from teacher’s list and that the students need to listen carefully. If they have a word on their Bingo card which teacher calls out, then they need to cross out the word. The winner is the one who first crossed out all of words in his/her Bingo card and should shout out ‘Bingo!’. - Students play the game.

Contents


FI CI A

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box and complete the text. Read and listen to the text and check your answers.  New words - water (n) (pic.)

OF

- minerals (n) (pic.)

ƠN

- vitamins (n) - diseases (n) (expl.) - fat (n) = lipid (n) (expl.) - protein (n) (expl.) - carbohydrates (n) (expl.) Suggested answers 1. Protein 2. Carbohydrates 3. Vitamins 4. diseases 5. Minerals 6. fat 7. fat 8. Water

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students can understand, remember and use the new words about nutrients. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to check the meanings of the words. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding and their answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Students work in pairs to check the meanings of the words in their dictionaries. - Teacher models pronunciation of the words, if necessary. And check students understand all the words. - Students read the text and complete it with the correct words. They compare answers in pairs. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and read, checking their answers.

L

- Teacher elicits a few words in Bingo cards. Explain that food has nutrients in it, which help keep us healthy. Tell students they are going to learn about the nutrients in food.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students know more about the nutrients in food. ❖ Contents: Students read the text again and do the task. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Students read the text again and decide if the sentences are true or false. They can compare their answers in pairs. (With stronger classes, students could discuss the sentences first and decide if they think they are true or false from memory, then check their answers by reading the text).

2. Read the text again. Are the sentences True or False? Suggested answers 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. True 6. False


3. Read the sentences and write the names of the food in the text. Suggested answers 1. butter Exercise 3: 2. olive oil - Students work in pairs to read the sentences 3. milk and write the names of the foods. 4. beans - Teacher checks answers with the class. 5. chocolate

FI CI A

L

- Teacher checks answers with the class. Ask students to explain why the false sentences are not correct.

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. What do you eat every day? Ask and answer questions with your partner to complete the table. Then use the information to draw a dinner plate for your partner. Who eats the healthiest food?

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate about the time in the different cities. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. ❖ Products: Students’ conversation. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the example question and answer. Elicit one or two more questions that students will need to ask, (e.g. What carbohydrates do you usually eat? Do you eat meat or fish every day?) - Students work in pairs to ask and answer questions and complete the table. They then draw a dinner plate for their partner. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class about their partner’s food and discuss how healthy it is. Optional activity: - Teacher put students into groups of four. Ask them to imagine they are in charge of their school canteen. Ask them to plan three healthy lunches for students. Tell them they must make sure they include foods from all the different food groups, and their lunches

ƠN

OF

4. Look at the picture of the dinner plate. Exercise 4: What nutrients are there in the five food - Teacher looks at the dinner plate and check groups? that students know the words for all the Suggested answers things on it. 1. vitamins, minerals, water - Students work in pairs to say what nutrients 2. carbohydrates there are in each food group. 3. protein - Teacher checks answers with the class. 4. fat 5. protein, minerals

(Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

must be tasty! Ask groups in turn to present their ideas to the class. The class could vote for their favourite lunches. - Students do as directed in group.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Draw a map - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 5. FOOD AND HEALTH

L

Lesson 9: Options

FI CI A

Puzzles and games

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all knowledge in Unit 5. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: - Solve all games and puzzles individually and in groups. - Self – revise all the lessons that have been learned. II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students get comfortable with classmates and focus their brains on content of the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students listen to the song “I’m hungry”. ❖ Products: Some words about food. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to watch and listen to the song. - Students listen and they can sing along it. - Teacher elecit some words about food from the song and then lead in the lesson.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students revise the words and some quantifiers they have learnt in Unit 5.

(https://youtu.be/nqwxYlix7Fw)

1. GUESS THE FOOD. Work in pairs. Look at the words in the box. One student chooses a word and makes a sentence about it. The other student listens and guesses the food.


L FI CI A

(Students’ own answers)

ƠN

OF

2. MEMORY GAME. Play in groups. Make sentences with a, an, a lot of, some and many. Follow the instructions

(Students’ own answers)

3. Find five adjectives about health on the plates. Write the words.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

❖ Contents: Students play games. ❖ Products: Students’ speaking. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the instructions and the example dialogue. - Students take turns saying a sentence about a type of food for their partner to guess. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs to prepare some sentences, then work in groups of four to read their sentences to each other and guess the words). As an extension, students could write one more sentence about a different kind of food from pages 62 and 63. Their partner must guess the food. - Teacher declares the winners are the pairs who guess the most correct words. Exercise 2: - Teacher reads out the example and explains the game. - Starting at the front of the class, students take turns repeating the list of items and adding one more. If students make a mistake, they are out of the game. Continue until only a few students remain in the game. They are the winners. - Teacher declares the winners. ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have revised to do the tasks given as well as develop their skills. ❖ Contents: Students find the adjectives about health then complete the “Crosssword” and complete the sentences with V-ing. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 3: - Students work individually or in pairs to unscramble the adjectives. (Teacher could do this as a race). - Teacher checks answers with the class. - As an extension, students could choose three more adjectives from page 66 and write them as jumbled words. They can swap with

(Students’ own answers)


FI CI A

L

4. Complete the crossword with the opposites of the adjectives from exercise 3. Suggested answers Down: 1. unfit / 2. hungry / 3. ill / 4. lazy Across: 1. unhealthy

ƠN

OF

5. Follow the lines and complete the sentences with the verb + -ing. Suggested answers 1. learning languages 2. playing tennis 3. sitting on the sofa 4. doing housework 5. drinking fizzy drinks

NH

a partner and try to unscramble the words they have been given. Exercise 4: - Students complete the crossword with the opposites of the adjectives from exercise 3. – - Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 5: - Teacher reads out the example answer and point out that students must add a suitable verb and noun to complete the sentences. (Teacher could do this as a race). (With weaker classes, teacher could write the verbs and nouns on the board in a jumbled order to help students, e.g. drink, sit, do, play, learn / languages, housework, the sofa, fizzy drinks, tennis). - Students do the task individually. - Teacher checks answers with the class. (With stronger classes, ask students to write two more sentences about things they like and don’t like doing. Students can compare their sentences in pairs. Ask some students to tell the class about their partner).

6. THE ‘PLEASE’ GAME. Work in groups. Follow the instructions.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have revised. ❖ Contents: Students play the game. ❖ Products: Students’ speaking. ❖ Organization: Exercise 6: - Teacher reads out the instructions for the game and brainstorm some possible instructions, (e.g. Stand up, Sit down, Write your name, Open your school bag). The instructions could also include things that students have to mime, (e.g. Play tennis, Eat a burger). - Students work in groups to play the game. - Teacher sets a time limit and see which students are still in the game at the end of that time. Alternatively, teacher could play the game with the whole class. Choose a student to give instructions, or give the

(Students’ own answers)


instructions yourself. Continue until there is only one student left in the game.

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

FI CI A

Sports

L

Lesson 1: Vocabulary

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask and answer about different sports. - develop students’ speaking and listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm what  THINK! What sports are popular in your they are going to study. country? ❖ Contents: Students answer the questions about some popular sports in their country. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks the question to the whole class and elicits answers from different students. - Students listen to the questions and work themselves. - Teacher asks more questions to encourage students to say more, for example: ? “Can you play this sport in your town / More questions: city? 1. Can you play this sport in your town / city? Do you do this sport at your school? 2. Do you do this sport at your school? Do you know someone who does this 3. Do you know someone who does this sport?” sport?” - Students answer on their own. (Students’ own answers.)


FI CI A

L

1. Match the words in the box with pictures 1– 16. Then listen and check. Which sports do you like?

ƠN

OF

 New words - athletics (n): môn điền kinh - golf (n): môn đánh gôn - gymnastics (n): thể dục, sự rèn luyện - hockey (n): môn khúc côn cầu - rugby (n): môn bóng bầu dục - sailing (n): môn chèo thuyền - skiing (n): môn trượt tuyết - wrestling (n): đấu vậ - champion (n): nhà vô địch - competition (n): sự cạnh tranh - fan (n): người hâm mộ; người say mê - match (n): cuộc thi đấu - race (n): cuộc đua - stadium (n): sân vận động

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to sports. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups. ❖ Products: Students can understand the meaning of new words. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to read the task, then asks them to work individually to match the words in the box with the suitable pictures. - Students match the sports with the pictures. They can use their dictionaries to check the different sports words, if necessary. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs to do this. With stronger classes, teacher could do it as a race.) - Teacher play the audio for students to listen and check. Then teacher gives the meaning of difficult words and asks students to repeat. - Students listen and repeat, then copy down. - Teacher have a class discussion about who likes which sport. - Students answer on their own.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students do the quiz and answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to read the quiz and explains how to do this task. - Students read the quiz and check the meanings of the blue words in their dictionaries. - Teacher checks that students understand all the words. (With weaker classes, teacher

Suggested answers 1. football 2. horse-riding 4. swimming 5. athletics 7. climbing 8. gymnastics 10. volleyball 11. golf 13. wrestling 14. sailing 16. basketball

3. tennis 6. cycling 9. skiing 12. hockey 15. rugby

2. Check the meanings of the words in blue in the Sports quiz. Then do the quiz in pairs or teams. Suggested answers 1. LeBron James, Kobe Bryant, etc. 2. Canada 3. 50 kilometre race walk 4. The Tour de France 5. Barcelona (the Camp Nou stadium) 6. Japan


7. b 8. Four 9. 50 metres 10. Two

Optional activity: Vocabulary - Teacher writes a gapped sports word on the board, for example: s _ _ i _ g (skiing). Then teacher asks students to guess the word. - Students work in pairs to write five gapped sports words. They then close their books, swap with another pair and try to complete the words they have been given. - Teacher sees which pair completes all five words correctly.

 Optional activity: Vocabulary Example: s _ _ i _ g (skiing).

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

reads out the quiz and elicits the blue words.). Teacher puts students into pairs or small groups to read the quiz again and answer as many questions as they can. Teacher could set a time limit for this. - Students work in pairs or small groups to do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class and asks students to add up their scores. Teacher sees who got the most correct answers, then allow students time to read the key, to see what it says about their scores. - Students follow the teacher’s guide.

M

QU Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher allows students time to read through the questions. - Students read through the questions quickly. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and answer the questions. Then teacher checks answers with the class.

3. Watch or listen and answer the questions. 1. Does Liane do any sports? 2. What sport does Lewis watch on TV? 3. Are there any sports Ray wants to try? Suggested answers 1. Yes, she does swimming. 2. He watches football on TV. 4. He wants to try skiing. 4. Watch or listen again and complete the Key Phrases.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 4: - Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to watch or listen and complete the key phrases. - Students listen and give the answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Suggested answers 1. swimming 2. getting up early every morning


OF

FI CI A

5. USE IT! Work in groups. Find out who is sports crazy. Change the words in blue in exercise 3 and ask and answer the questions. Use the Key Phrases.

ƠN

(Students’ own answers)

 Finished? Write more quiz questions. (Students’ own answers)

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can find out who is sports crazy. ❖ Contents: Students find out who is sports crazy. ❖ Products: Student’s working. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher reads out the example question, then allows students time to reform the questions in exercise 4 to ask a partner. (With weaker classes, do this with the whole class and write the questions on the board.) - Students then ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class if their partner is sports crazy. See who is the most sports crazy in the class. Finished? - Teacher asks students to write more quiz questions. - Students can write their questions individually and ask and answer with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks students to read their questions to the class. See if other students can answer them.

L

3. school 4. basketball 5. skiing

M

ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words - Prepare for next lesson

DẠ

Y

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

FI CI A

The Olympics then and now

L

Lesson 2: Reading

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for specific information. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! When and where are the next ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm what Olympic Games? Which sport in the box is they are going to study. NOT in the Olympics? ❖ Contents: Students answer the time and place which the next Olympic Games will take place. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to look at their book, reads the questions with the class and elicits possible answers: ? “When and where are the next Olympic Games? Which sport in the box is NOT in the Olympics?” - Students work individually, then compare with their partners. ( Students’ own answer) - Teacher tells students the answers, and sees Cricket is not in the Olympics. who gave the correct answers. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION


NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

❖ Aims: Help students know the sports mentioned in the text. ❖ Contents: Students read the sports in the text. ❖ Products: Students can tell the class what sports mentioned. ❖ Organization: Pre-reading Exercise 1: 1. Read the text. What sports does it mention? - Teacher asks students to focus on the text. (With weaker classes, teacher could use the dates to revise and practise saying dates in Suggested answers. English. Point to each date in turn and elicit swimming, marathon / running, golf, rugby how to say it.) - Students read and note down the sports that are mentioned. They can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class and makes sure students can mostly understand the text. - Students listen and copy down.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students read and listen carefully for specific information. ❖ Contents: Students make True/False statements. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-reading Exercise 2: - Teacher allows students time to read the sentences. Point out that for this task they need to read and listen carefully to find specific information. Point out that they can use the dates and other clues to find the relevant part of the text quickly. Then they need to listen carefully to see if each sentence is true or false. (With stronger classes, students could correct the false sentences.) - Students do the task and compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class and

2. Read and listen to the text and write True or False. Suggested answers. 1. False (There were only silver and bronze medals.) 2. True 3. False (She was from Denmark.) 4. True 5. False (They were Olympic sports for the first time in 2016.)


encourages students to give evidence from the text to support their answers. - Students give evidence from the text to support their answers.

QU Y

2. 1920 4. 1960

ƠN

3. VOCABULARY PLUS. Use a dictionary to check the meanings of the words in blue in the text. Fill in the gaps. 1. A …….. wins a competition. 2. A …….. wins a medal. 3. A …….. swims.

NH

Post-reading Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students check the meanings of the words in blue. Discuss the meanings with the class. Teacher could ask students to translate the words into their own language to check understanding. - Students work in groups to give the meaning of the blue words. - Teacher writes the following gapped sentences on the board, then asks students to fill in the gaps to check more their understanding. - Students give the answers. - Teacher checks the answers with the class.

OF

1. Greece 3. 12

FI CI A

L

 Optional activity: Reading 1. Where were the first modern Olympic Games? 2. When did the Olympic flag first appear? Optional activity: reading 3. How old was the youngest medallist in the -Teacher writes some questions on the board, history of the games? then asks students to answer to give short 4. When did a runner with no shoes win the answers. marathon? - Students answer the questions. They read or listen to find each answer. Suggested answers.

Suggested answers. 1. winner 2. medallist

3. swimmer

DẠ

Y

M

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Which piece of ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION information in the text do you think is the ❖ Aims: Teacher helps students consolidate most interesting? What sports do you like the lesson watching in the Olympics? ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ comprehension ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers to the questions individually. - Students discuss the questions in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to report back More question: to the class. Discuss as a class which sports 1. Which sports do you find boring? students enjoy watching. Ask more questions 2. Which would you like to try? to extend the discussion, for example: 3. Which would you like to see live? (Students’ own answers.) ? “Which sports do you find boring?


FI CI A

L

Which would you like to try? Which would you like to see live?” - Students answer. - Teacher see which sports are the most and least popular with the class. ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

FI CI A

• there was(n't), there were(n't) • was(n't), were(n't)

L

Lesson 3: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about past events. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Teacher elicits the information from students about the last lesson, then leads in the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students recall what they have studied from the last lesson. ❖ Products: Students’ sentences ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their book and asks what they can remember about the Olympic Games. - Students recall what they have studied from the last lesson. - Teacher elicits a few ideas, then reads out the following dates: 1896, 1920, 2016, 2020. See if students can remember what happened. - Students answer. - Teacher writes sentences with WAS and WERE on the board.

Contents

Brainstorm - 1896: The first modern Olympic Games were in Greece. - 1920: There wasn’t an Olympic flag until 1920 - 2016: There were two new events in Rio in 2016 - 2020: In 2020, there was a global problem


FI CI A

 GRAMMAR POINT  There was(n’t)/ There were(n’t)

ƠN

OF

1. Complete the examples from the text on page 74. Then choose the correct words in the Rules.

Suggested answers. 1. There were Rules: 1. Singular

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the rules of there was/were. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the teacher’s guide and do exercise. ❖ Products: Students can understand the Rules. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the examples and asks students to translate them into their language. - Students then find examples of negative forms. - Teacher elicits the negative forms and writes them on the board. Read out the questions and elicit the answers. Then read through the rules with the class and elicit the correct words. - Students listen and remember the Rules.

L

- Students open their books to check their answers. - Teacher underlines WAS and WERE on the board and elicits that they refer to the past.

2. Complete the text with affirmative and negative forms of there was and there were.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the structures they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Teacher draws students’ attention to the glossary at the bottom of the text. - Students read the text and complete it with the correct forms. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

2. There wasn’t 2. plural

Suggested answers. 1. there was 2. there were 3. There was 4. there wasn’t 5. there weren’t 6. There weren’t 3. Complete the sentences with affirmative and negative forms of there was and there were. Use many, any or a / an. Suggested answers.


L

1 … there weren’t any rich footballers. 2 … there were many chariot races. 3 … there was a country called Persia. 4 … there wasn’t a sport called skateboarding. 5 … there were many messengers. 6 … there weren’t any iPads.

FI CI A

Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to focus on the first prompt and elicits the answer. - Students complete the sentences with the correct forms. - Teacher check answers with the class.

OF

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your Exercise 4: sentences in exercise 3 - Teacher puts students into pairs or groups of four to compare their sentences and decide (Students’ own answers.) which are the same and which are different .  GRAMMAR POINT  was(n't), were(n't)

ƠN

5. Complete the sentences about the Olympics timeline text on page 74. Then complete the rule

QU Y

NH

Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to complete the sentences with the correct words from the text on page 74. - Students do the exercise, then complete the rule. - Teacher checks answers with the class, and plays the grammar animation.

6. Complete the sentences with was and were and your own ideas.

M

Exercise 6: - Teacher reads out the example and asks students to do the exercise. - Students complete the sentences with their own ideas.

Suggested answers. 1. were 2. was 3. was 4. wasn’t 5. weren’t Rule: is and are; wasn’t and weren’t

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the structures. ❖ Contents: Students compare the sentences ❖ Products: Students’ working ❖ Organization: Exercise 7: - Students compare their answers in pairs.

7. USE IT! Work in groups. Compare your sentences in exercise 6.  Finished? Think of more differences between life 100 years ago and now. Use there was, there were, was and were.


OF

FI CI A

L

- Teacher asks students to listen to their partner’s sentences and choose one interesting thing to tell the class about their partner. Finished? - Students can write their sentences individually and compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks them to read their sentences to the class, omitting was / wasn’t / were / weren’t. See if other students can guess the missing words.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all structures. -Prepare the next lesson

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening

FI CI A

X Games: Regular and irregular verbs

L

UNIT 6: SPORTS

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand specific information in a programme about the X Games. - develop students’ listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents  THINK! What sports are difficult and dangerous? Are these sports popular in your country?

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand the situation and lead in new lesson ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads out the questions and checks that students understand dangerous. Elicit answers from individual students. - Students answer the question individually. - Teacher asks more questions to encourage students to say more, for example: ? “Why is this sport dangerous? Would you like to try this sport?”

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students get an ideal about the X Games as well as identify the verb forms.

More question: 1. Why is this sport dangerous? 2. Would you like to try this sport? 1. Check the meanings of verbs 1–10. Then read the text and sentences 1–4. Match verbs 1–10 with the past simple forms in blue. Listen and check.  New words


NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

❖ Contents: Students match verbs with the past simple forms. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Pre-listening Exercise 1: - skateboarding (n): môn trượt ván - Teacher uses the photos to teach some important words, then asks students to listen and repeat. - Students listen and repeat new words. - Teacher reads through the verbs with the class and checks that students understand them all. - BMX ( Bike Motor Cross) :trò chơi mạo hiểm - Students read the text and the four với xe đạp địa hình. sentences, and match the verbs with their past forms. - Teacher plays the audio for students to listen and check their answers. Tell them not to worry about the options in the sentences at this stage. - motocross: cuộc đua mô tô trên đường khó đi Suggested answers. 1. learned 2. started 3. went 4. won 5. travelled 6. became 7. watched 8. did 9. competed 10. decided Optional activity: Vocabulary

QU Y

- Teacher writes some collocations on the board and asks students to complete the collocations with verbs from exercise 1. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-listening Exercise 2: - Teacher reads the task and makes sure students understand they must choose who is talking from column A and the phrases they hear from column B. Point out that they are

 Optional activity: Vocabulary 1. to a competition / a medal 2. to TV / a film / a football match 3. to a language / to ski 4. to in a race / in a competition Suggested answers. 1. win 2. watch 3. Learn 4. compete 2. Listen to information about Alana Smith and Tom Schaar. From column A, choose who is talking. From column B, choose where they are.


L FI CI A

Suggested answers. Alana: 1. b 2. a Tom: 1. a 2. c

3. c 3. b

4. b 4. b

 Optional activity: Listening 1. Alana watched the X Games when she was five. 2. She won a gold medal when she was twelve. 3. Tom Schaar was on this programme one year ago. 4. A 1080 is an easy trick.

M

QU Y

NH

Optional activity: Listening - Teacher dictates these sentences to the class, or writes them on the board, then asks students to correct the sentences. Play the audio. - Students listen and correct the sentences. - Teacher asks students to listen again and correct the sentences. Check answers with the class.

3. Listen again and look at sentences 1–4 in the text. Choose the correct answers for Alana and then for Tom.

OF

Post-listening Exercise 3: - Teacher refers students back to the sentences after the text. Allow them time to read the sentences and the options. Point out that students must listen carefully to hear the specific information they need. Play the audio again. - Students listen and choose the correct answers for Alana and Tom. Students check and complete their answers.

Suggested answers. 2, 6

ƠN

listening for the general meaning, so they don’t need to understand every word. Play the audio. - Students listen and choose the correct answers.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson ❖ Contents: Students work individual ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher points out to students that most of the questions need the base form of the verb, but one question needs the -ing form. - Students follow the teacher’s guide.

Suggested answers. 1. Alana watched the X Games when she was six. 2. She won a silver medal when she was twelve. 3. Tom Schaar was on this programme two years ago. 4. A 1080 is a very difficult trick.

4. USE IT! Complete the questions with the correct form of the verbs in the box. Then ask and answer with a partner Suggested answers. 1. learn 2. travel 3. become 4. winning, competing 5. do (Students’ own answers.)


L

- Teacher checks the questions with the class, then puts students into pairs to ask and answer them.

FI CI A

ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

FI CI A

• Past simple: affirmative • Past time expressions

L

Lesson 5: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about events in the past. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

Brainstorm:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students identify and understand the situation of using the past simple. ❖ Contents: Students write information about Alana and Tom. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their books then asks: ? “What can you remember about Alana and Tom?” - Students answer individually. - Teacher elicits some answers and writes some past simple sentences on the board, for example: She won a silver medal. He learned to skateboard when he was four. Underline the verbs and explain that they are in the past simple tense. Tell students they are going to study this now.

Example: She won a silver medal. He learned to skateboard when he was four


L

FI CI A

 GRAMMAR POINT. Past simple: affirmative  S + V2/ed + …  Language note - With most regular verbs, we add -ed to the base form of the verb: play – played. - With verbs ending in -e, we just add -d: compete – competed.

OF

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand how to use the past simple in affirmative form. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the structures and complete the rules. ❖ Products: Students understand the structures and complete the rules. ❖ Organization:

NH

Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the examples, then reads through the rules with the class and elicits the answers. - Students answer. - Teacher plays the grammar animation.

ƠN

1. Look at the examples and complete Rules 1– 3 with have got or haven’t got.

Suggested answers. 1. have got 2. haven’t got

3. have got

2. Read the Study Strategy. Then complete the Young sports superstars text with the past simple form of the verbs in blue.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Teacher reads the study strategy with the class and refers students to the irregular verbs list on page 76 of the Workbook. - Students complete the text with the correct forms of the verbs. -Teacher points out that students should check all the verbs in blue on the irregular verbs list, and if some verbs are not on the list, they can assume these verbs are regular. Check answers with the class and elicit which verbs are regular and which are irregular.

Suggested answers. 1. started 2. went 4. competed 5. became 7. played 8. trained

3. won 6. scored 9. gave


FI CI A

L

 PRONUNCIATION: -ed endings

OF

Exercise 3: - Teacher teaches students how to pronoun the words ending in -ED. - Students listen and copy down.

NH

ƠN

- Teacher plays the audio once for students to listen then plays it again, pausing after each verb for students to repeat. - Students listen and repeat. 3. Listen and repeat the words. Which letters - Teacher asks the question to the class and come before the -ed ending in list 3? elicits the answer: ? “Which letters come before the -ed ending Suggested answers. in list 3?” ‘t’ and ‘d’

QU Y

 GRAMMAR POINT. Past time expressions 4. Look at the examples and answer the questions.

M

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads out the examples of past time expressions, then reads out the questions and discusses the answers with the class. - Students work in groups.

DẠ

Y

Suggested answers. ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION 1. Students’ own answers. ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way 2. after of using the past simple. ❖ Contents: Students write sentences using the past simple and the Key Phrases ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization:


QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart the structures. -Do exercises ( in workbook ) -Prepare for next lesson – Speaking

L

FI CI A

OF  Finished? Write true and false statements about your life. Use the verbs on this page.

NH

Finished? - Students can write their true and false statements individually then compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks fast finishers to read their statements to the class. Ask the class to guess whether each statement is true or false

5. USE IT! Write sentences using the past simple and the Key Phrases. Then compare with other people in the class. Are any of your sentences the same? Example: I last (play) sport … => I last played sport on Saturday. (Students’ own answers.)

ƠN

- Teacher reads through the key phrases with the class and checks that students understand them all. Read out the example sentence and elicit one or two more examples. - Students then write their sentences individually, with their own ideas. (With weaker classes, teacher elicits the past simple verb forms first, then asks students to write their sentences.) - Teacher puts students into small groups to compare their sentences. Ask them to note down whose sentences are the same as theirs. Ask some students to tell the class which of their sentences were the same as their classmates’.

DẠ

Y

M

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

L

Lesson 6: Speaking

FI CI A

Last weekend

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - talk about what they did at the weekend. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson: Contents  THINK! Think of three answers for the question ‘How was your weekend?’.

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm and lead in new lesson ❖ Contents: Students talk about their weekend. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads the question with the class and elicits a range of answers from individual students, for example: It was fine. It was really nice. A bit boring! - Students work individually.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students open mind about the situation they may have in the lesson ❖ Contents: Students complete the dialogue. ❖ Products: Students’ answers.

Example: (?) How was your weekend? => It was fine. It was really nice. A bit boring (Students’ own answers.)


1. Complete the dialogue. Then watch or listen and check. Why was Alfie happy on Saturday?

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students talk about what they did at the weekend as well as develop speaking skill ❖ Contents: Students practice the dialogue. ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization While-speaking Exercise 2: - Teacher explains the tasks and asks students to work in pairs. - Students cover the dialogue and try to complete the key phrases from memory. - Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to listen and check their answers. Check answers with the class and check that students understand all the key phrases.

2. Look at the Key Phrases. Cover the dialogue and try to complete the Key Phrases. Then watch or listen and check.

Optional activity: - Teacher plays the video or audio again, pausing after each of the key phrases and getting students to repeat them. Encourage students to copy the intonation on the recording. - Students do as requested.

 Optional activity: Speaking (Students’ own answers.)

3. went 7. were

4. Was

Suggested answers. 1. How 2. That’s 4. Why 5. Why

3. Who 6. when

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Suggested answers. 1. was 2. was 5. were 6. won

FI CI A

L

❖ Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to complete the dialogue. - Students read the gapped dialogue and complete it with the correct words. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to watch or listen and checks their answers. - Teacher asks students about the dialogue to check their understanding: ? “Why was Alfie happy on Saturday?” - Students answer

DẠ

Exercise 3: 3. Look at the phrases. Then listen to three - Teacher reads through the phrases with the mini-dialogues. Which phrases do you hear? class and checks that students understand everything. Play the audio.


5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Look at the pictures. Imagine that you went to a football match or basketball game last weekend. Prepare and practise new dialogues with the phrases in exercises 2 and 3.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way of talking about their weekend. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to make a new dialogue. ❖ Products: Students’ performance. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to focus on each picture in turn and, with the whole class, build up a possible dialogue using some of the key phrases from exercise 2 and phrases from exercise 3. Put students into pairs to prepare and practice their own dialogues. - Students work in pairs to practise their own dialogues.

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

- Students listen and note down the phrases Suggested answers. that they hear. 1. It wasn’t great. I went to the cinema on - Teacher check answers with the class. Saturday. The film was really boring. 2. It was brilliant. I went to a tennis match. The game was amazing. 3. It was OK. I went to a restaurant with my Post-speaking parents. The food was nice. Exercise 4: - Teacher demonstrates the activity by getting a student to ask him/her about his/her weekend. 4. Work in pairs. Practise mini-dialogues - Students ask teacher about his/her weekend. using the phrases in exercises 2 and 3. - Teacher answers using phrases from exercise 3, then asks a confident student about their weekend and elicits an answer. Put students into pairs to practise mini (Students’ own answers.) dialogues. Ask some students to perform their dialogues for the class. - Students work in pairs to practise mini dialogues.

(Students’ own answers.)

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

Feedback:......................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

L

Lesson 7: Writing

FI CI A

A sports star

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write a profile of a sports star using paragraphs. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents  THINK! Name five famous international sports stars. Who is the most famous sports star in your country? What is his / her sport?

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students name five famous international sports stars. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks the questions to the class and elicits answers from individual students. - Students answer on their own. - Teacher encourages students to share their knowledge and talk about sports stars they are interested in. Ask further questions to encourage them to speak more, for example: ? “Why is this person famous? Do you admire them? Why? / Why not?”

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2: KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

More question 1. Why is this person famous? 2. Do you admire them? Why? / Why not?” (Students’ own answers)


L

FI CI A

- sprint race: chạy nước rút

OF

Suggested answers. In Sherwood Content, Jamaica. In 2002.

2. Look at the Key Phrases. Which phrases do we use in paragraphs 1–3? Read the profile again and check.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help student get to know how to write a profile of a sports star using paragraphs as well as develop writing skill. ❖ Contents: Students do the tasks given. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization While-writing Exercise 2: - Teacher puts students into pairs to read the key phrases and discuss in which paragraph of the profile each one would be used. - Students can read the profile again to check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

1. Read the profile. Where was Usain Bolt born? When was his first world champion?

ƠN

❖ Aims: Help students have an idea of writing a profile of a sports star using paragraphs. ❖ Contents: Students read the profile and answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to focus on the profile and elicits what students know about Usain Bolt: ? “Where was Usain Bolt born? When was his first world champion?” - Students read the profile and answer the questions. Students can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers. Paragraph 1: 1 and 2 Paragraph 2: 3 Paragraph 3: 4, 5 and 6  LANGUAGE POINT: Paragraphs


3. Read the text again. Match three topics from a–e with paragraphs 1–3

FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers. Paragraph 1: c Paragraph 2: e Paragraph 3: b

ƠN

 Optional activity: Writing 1. He was born ….21st August 1986. 2. He….. lives in Kingston. 3. He first competed…. a schoolboy. 4. He became the youngest ever world junior champion….. the age of 16. 5. He …..world record in 100- and 200- metre races.

QU Y

NH

Optional activity: Writing - Teacher asks students to close their books. Write the following gapped sentences on the board ➔ - Teacher puts students into pairs to complete the sentences from memory. They can then check their answers in the profile. Elicit or point out that “ we use first and after that for ordering events, and we use the other phrases for saying exactly when something happened.” Point out that “ we say on 21st August, but we say in 1986.” - Students work in pairs to complete the sentences from memory.

L

Exercise 3: - Teacher reads through the topics with the class and makes sure students understand them all. - Students match three topics with the three paragraphs in the profile. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Point out that students should try to structure their own writing into clear paragraphs.

4. at

5. broke

4. USE IT! Read the Skills Strategy. Then follow the steps in the writing guide.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to write a profile of a sports star using paragraphs. ❖ Contents: Students think and plan. ❖ Products: Students’ writing ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to read the skills strategy before doing exercise 4. Read the task with the class. - Students read through the ‘think and plan’ section. Students write their profile. (This can be set for homework.)

Suggested answers. 1. on 2. now 3. as

(Students’ own answers.)


- Teacher reminds students to check their grammar and spelling carefully.

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

L

Lesson 8: CULTURE

FI CI A

Football vs. basketball

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand a text about football and basketball. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students answer the questions ❖ Products: Students’answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their book, and asks: ? “Who likes football? Which teams do you support? Where do they play? What are the main football competitions?” - Students answer the questions. - Teacher elicits a few answers, and asks: ? “What do you know about basketball? Where is it popular? How do you play it?” - Students answer the questions. - Teacher elicits a range of answers, and leads in the new lesson.

Contents

Brainstorm

Questions: 1. Who likes football? 2. Which teams do you support? 3. Where do they play? 4. What are the main football competitions? More questions: 1. What do you know about basketball? 2. Where is it popular? 3. How do you play it? (Students’ own answers.)


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

* Background - Football, known as soccer in the USA, is the world’s most popular sport. It is played and watched in most countries in the world. Tickets to New York Yankees baseball games cost from $20 - 25, whereas tickets to Manchester United games cost around £80. - Basketball is a team sport in which two teams, most commonly of five players each, opposing one another on a rectangular court, compete with the primary objective of shooting a basketball (approximately 9.4 inches (24 cm) in diameter) through the defender's hoop (a basket 18 inches (46 cm) in diameter mounted 10 feet (3.048 m) high to a backboard at each end of the court) while preventing the opposing team from shooting through their own hoop. A field goal is worth two points, unless made from behind the ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE three-point line, when it is worth three. After a FORMATION foul, timed play stops and the player fouled or ❖ Aims: Help students identify the words designated to shoot a technical foul is given one, related to the football and basketball. two or three one-point free throws. The team ❖ Contents: Students match the words with with the most points at the end of the game wins, the pictures but if regulation play expires with the score tied, ❖ Products: Students can identify the an additional period of play (overtime) is words. mandated. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: 1. Match the words in the box with 1–5 - Teacher asks students to look at the photos and work in pairs to answer the questions. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher elicits a few possible answers. - Students then read the text and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Suggested answers. 1. basketball player 2. captain ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE 3. stadium 4. fan 5. teams ❖ Aims: Help students understand a text about football and basketball. ❖ Contents: Students do the tasks given. ❖ Products: Students’ performance. ❖ Organization Exercise 2: 2. Read and listen to the text. Then answer - Teacher asks students to read and listen to the questions. the text and answer the questions


Suggested answers. 1. 1989 2. The FIFA World Cup and the AFC Asian Cup 3. In Hà Nội 4. No, you can watch athletics events and concerts. 5. Yes, it is. 6. On the internet 7. Music and dancing

FI CI A

L

- Students read and listen to the text and answer the questions. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

ƠN

OF

Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to answer the questions. - Students answer the questions. They can 3. YOUR CULTURE. Answer the questions. use the internet to find the information if they Use the internet to help you find the have access in class. They can compare their information you need. answers in pairs. - Teacher discusses the answers with the (Students’ own answers.) class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to interview with a famous sports star. ❖ Contents: Students practise an interview. 4. USE IT! Prepare and practise an interview ❖ Products: Students’ interview. with a famous sports star. Follow the ❖ Organization: instructions. Exercise 4: - As a class, teacher brainstorms some famous sports stars that students could roleplay interviews with, then elicits some questions they could ask. Put students into pairs to prepare and practise their interviews. - Students work in pairs to role-play interviews - Teacher asks some pairs to act out their interviews for the class. (Students’ own answers.) ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 6: SPORTS

L

Lesson 9: Options

FI CI A

Puzzles and games

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all lessons in Unit 6. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students warm-up and lead in the new lesson ❖ Contents: Students work groups to play the game ❖ Products: Students’ guessing ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher divides students into small groups. Each group writes the names of the sports on page 72 onto individual pieces of paper, and places them face down on their desk. - Students then take turns picking up a piece of paper and drawing the sport. Their classmates must guess the sports. See who guessed the most sports correctly.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

Contents 2. SPORT ART. Work in groups. Write the names of the sports on page 72 on pieces of paper. One student takes a piece of paper and draws the sport. The others guess. The winner is the person who guesses the most sports.

(Students’ own answers.)


OF

FI CI A

L

1. Use the grid to find the first and last letters of sports 1–8. Then write the sports.

Suggested answers. 1. football 2. athletics 3. hockey 4. rugby 5. gymnastics 6. volleyball 7. judo 8. tennis

ƠN

❖ Aims: Help students revise some vocabularies related to sports. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to complete the task. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to focus on the example and demonstrates how the co ordinates work to identify the first and last letters of each sport. - Students write the sports. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this activity. With stronger classes, teacher could do it as a race.) - As an extension, students could work in pairs and use the grid to write clues for the first and last letters of two more sports. They could swap with another pair and race to write the sports they have been given.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop skills ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs and groups to do the tasks 3. MEMORY GAME. Work in pairs. Follow ❖ Products: Students’ performance the instructions. ❖ Organization Exercise 3: -Teacher reads through the task with the class and make sures students know what they have to do. Tell them they must include more than one of some objects, for example: two pens or three books. Put students into pairs to play the memory game. Monitor while students are working and make sure they are using there was / were correctly. See who gets the most points overall. - Students work in pairs to play the memory game. - Alternatively, teacher could play the game with the whole class. Put a selection of objects on your desk and give students a (Students’ own answers.)


L

FI CI A

OF Suggested answers. 1. went 2. won 4. became 5. learned 7. did 8. competed

3. travelled 6. watched 9. decided

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to join the letters to find the past simple forms. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this activity. With stronger classes, teacher could do it as a race.) - Students join the letters to find the past simple forms. - Teacher checks answers with the class and elicits which verbs are regular and which are irregular. - As an extension, teacher could ask students to choose three of the verbs and write example sentences for them. Ask some students to read their sentences to the class.

4. Join the letters to find regular and irregular past simple forms.

ƠN

minute to look at them. Ask them to close their eyes, and remove the objects. Elicit sentences about what objects were on the desk, and write them on the board. - Students do as requested.

5. Complete the sentences. Then write the past simple form of the missing verbs in the puzzle. Then use the letters in the grey boxes to make a mystery word.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 4: PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have learnt ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs ❖ Products: Students’ questions ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to complete the sentences, then writes the verbs from the sentences into the puzzle. - Students then look at the grey boxes and find the mystery word. (With weaker classes, teacher could encourage students to look back through the unit to find the past simple forms. With stronger classes, do not allow students to look back, and teacher could do it as a race.) - Teacher checks answers and elicits the mystery word. Elicit some example sentences using the mystery word.

Suggested answers. 1. was 2. broke 5. went 6. did Mystery word: skate

3. ran 7. were

4. won


FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 5: HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 7: GROWING UP

FI CI A

• Describing people

L

Lesson 1: Vocabulary

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe people. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Introduce information about some famous people to students. ❖ Contents: Students listen to a tape and match suitable pictures. ❖ Products: Famous people’ pictures and students’ answer. ❖ Organization: - Teacher plays an audio about famous people and asks students to match each picture with suitable description in the tape. - Students listen to the tape (2 times) to match. - Teacher checks the answer with class by playing the tape again and presents more information of these famous people. Then, teacher asks more questions to encourage students to say more, (e.g. Who are your favourite singers / actors? Which famous person would you most like to meet? Why?) - Students answer.

(Unit 7 - Back ground - Lesson 1 - Warm up.mp3)

Answer: 1 – g. Lady Gaga 2 – a. Emma Watson 3 – e. Jotnny Deep 4 – d. Yiruma 5 – b. Keanu Reeves 6 – f. Angelina Jolie 7 – c. Park Hang – seo.  THINK! Which famous people do you like? Why? (Students’ own answers)


L FI CI A

OF

2. Listen and repeat the words in exercise 1. Which words describe you? Example: I’m short and slim. My hair is … (Students’ own answers)

QU Y

NH

Exercise 2: - Teacher plays the audio once for students to listen. And then, play it again, pausing after each word for them to repeat. - Students listen and repeat after the audio. - Teacher asks students to write two or three sentences about themselves, using words from exercise 1. Students can compare their sentences in pairs. Ask some students to tell the class which words describe them.

1. Complete 1–6 with the words in the box. Suggested answers 1. short 2. long 3. red 4. round 5. green 6. moustache

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: To presents, practice and consolidate new words related to appearance. ❖ Contents: - Students complete with the words in the box then listen and repeat the words. ❖ Products: Students can remember, understand and use the new words. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to look at the pictures and complete 1–6 with the correct words. - Student work in pairs to do the task. They can use their dictionaries to check any meanings they don’t know. - Teacher checks answers with the class and check that students understand all the words.

/aɪ/, /aʊ/, /ɪə/, /eə/.

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students practice to pronounce dipthongs:

DẠ

Y

- Students watch/listen to the tap 2 times, then answer the question. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Exercise 3: - Teacher plays the first four words and elicit which one is the odd one out. Point out that all of these sounds are diphthongs, which are made up of two vowel sounds pronounced

3. Listen. Which word is the odd one out?  Pronunciation Diphthongs: /aɪ/, /aʊ/, /ɪə/, /eə/ Suggested answers 1. hair 2. board 3. height 4. bald


FI CI A

OF

5. Watch or listen again. Which key phrases does Lewis use?

QU Y

NH

Exercise 5: - Teacher reads through the key phrases with the class and check that students understand them all. Play the video or audio again. - Students watch or listen and identify the key phrases that are used. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

4. Watch or listen. Look at photos a–g. Which photos are the people talking about? Suggested answers 1. photo a 2. photo g 3. photo b

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher focuses attention on the Who’s who? quiz. Play the video or audio. - Students watch or listen and guess which photos the people are talking about, then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

L

together, although in number 3, ear, the two vowel sounds /ɪə/, are pronounced more noticeably as two sounds. Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and identify the odd ones out. - Teacher plays the audio again to check answers, and get students to repeat some of the words with diphthongs.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can describe people. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to ask and answer questions using the Key phrases. ❖ Products: Student’s talking. ❖ Organization: Exercise 6: - Teacher focuses attention on the Who’s who quiz again. - Students choose the correct words in descriptions 1–7 and then match the descriptions to photos a–g. - Teacher asks students to name the famous people and see who guessed the most people correctly. - Students compare their answers in pairs using the key phrases. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers I’m not sure. I think it’s ......

6. USE IT! Choose the correct words in descriptions 1–7. Then match the descriptions to photos a–g and name the famous people. Compare with a partner using the Key Phrases. Suggested answers 1. straight, b (Lady Gaga) 2. straight, c (Yiruma) 3. a moustache, e (Johnny Depp) 4. long, f (Angelina Jolie) 5. glasses, d (Park Hang-seo) 6. black, a (Keanu Reeves)


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.48). - Prepare new lesson.

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

Optional activity: 7. light, g (Emma Watson) - Teacher writes the vocabulary from exercise 1 in a jumbled order on the board, then ask students to close their books. Put students into small groups. Ask groups in turn to choose a word and say a true sentence about one of their classmates using the word, (e.g. Ana’s got long hair). If the sentence is correct, the group gets a point and the word is crossed off the board. Continue until all the words have been crossed off. See which group has the most points. - Students do as directed. * Finished? Finished? Write a description of a friend in - Teacher refers fast finishers to the the class. Finished? activity. (Students’ own answers) - Students can write their descriptions and work with another fast finisher to identify the people. Alternatively, ask them to read their descriptions to the class. See if other students can guess the people.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 7: GROWING UP

L

Lesson 2: Reading

FI CI A

• Childhood photos

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - understand the general idea of a text. - develop students’ reading skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up : during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP GAME: Pelmanism ❖ Aims: Students can predict the content of a text about the growing up. ❖ Contents: Students play the game “Pelmanism” and then answer the questions. take gave change ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher gives 12 cards on the screen, one side is numbered, one has the content that students need to practice (eg: simple presentchanged grow took simple past- eg: go-went, ...). Divide the class into 3 groups and ask each group to choose 2 cards. Then students open 2 cards that they chose, if they match, get 1 point. IF not, play again. grew give make - Students listen to the instructions carefully. then play the game in groups. Each group will choose a pair of number. The group has the most correct answers will be the winner.

made

collect

collected


L FI CI A OF 1. Look at the picture. What is special about it? Read and check your answer. Suggested answers c. Munish made the picture from 6,575 photos of his daughter.

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: To present the general meaning of the text. ❖ Contents: Students read and answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students can understand the general meaning of the text and students’ answer. ❖ Organization: Pre-reading Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the question. Explain that although there is only one question to answer, students must read the whole text in order to answer it because it is asking about the general meaning. Tell students not to worry if they don’t understand all the details of the text, but just to read for the general meaning. - Students read and answer the question. - Teacher checks the answer with the class.

 THINK! Did you look very different last week and five years ago? How? ( Students’ own answers )

ƠN

- Teacher reads the questions with the class and put students in pairs to discuss their answers. - Students use the T – P – S method to do the task. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class how one of their classmates looked different five years ago.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop reading skill. ❖ Contents: Students work individual/ pairs/ groups. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-reading Exercise 2: - Teacher allows students time to read the sentences. Point out that for this task students need to read and listen carefully to find

2. Read and listen to the text and write True or False. Suggested answers 1. False (Sometimes she was tired or sad.) 2. True


OF

FI CI A

L

3. False (From one day to the next she didn’t change a lot.) 4. True

ƠN

Optional activity. Suggested answers 1. A few hours old / less than one day old. 2. She didn’t look at the camera. 3. On her 18th birthday.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

specific information, to decide if the sentences are true or false. (With stronger classes, students could correct the false sentences). - Students do the task as directed in pairs. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class and encourage students to give evidence from the text to support their answers. Optional activity - Teacher writes the following questions on the board or dictate them to the class: 1. How old do you think Suman was when Munish took the first photo? 2. What did Suman do when she was tired and sad? 3. When did Munish take the final photo of Suman for the picture? - Students discuss the answers in pairs from memory, then check their ideas in the text. – - Teaher checks answers with the class. Exercise 3: - Teacher focuses on the words in blue in the text (or uses the flash cards in warm – up) and elicit that they are all past simple forms. - Students check the meanings of the verbs and find the infinitive forms. - Teacher checks answers with the class and elicit which verbs are regular and which are irregular. Optional activity - Teacher puts students into pairs. Ask them to write three example sentences using the blue past simple verbs from the text. Ask pairs in turn to read out one of their sentences, omitting the verb. See if other students can guess the missing verbs - Students make three sentences.

3. Check the meanings of the words in blue in the text.  Vocabulary plus - take => took (v) - grow => grew (v) - change => changed (v) - collect => collected (v) - make => made (v) - give => gave (v) * Chú ý: - Có 2 loại động từ: Có quy tắc và bất quy tắc. - Cách thêm đuôi “ed” vào sau động từ có quy tắc: + Thông thường ta thêm "ed" vào sau động từ để thành lập dạng quá khứ. (look => looked ) + Những động từ tận cùng bằng “e” (câm), “ee” ta chỉ việc thêm “d” vào cuối động từ đó. (agree => agreed) + Động từ 1 âm tiết, kết thúc bằng “Nguyên âm + Phụ âm” => gấp đôi phụ âm + "ed" (stop => stopped)


OF

ƠN

4. USE IT! Work in groups. What do you think of Munish’s special picture? Has your family got a lot of photos? ( Students’ own answers )

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: To consiolidate the lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. ❖ Products: Students’ speaking. ❖ Organization: Post-reading Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers to the questions individually. They then discuss the questions in pairs. Ask some students to report back to the class. Discuss as a class what most families have photos of. Ask more questions to extend the discussion, (e.g. How often do you take photos? What do you usually take photos of? Do you take them on a camera or your phone? How many photos do you have on your camera / phone? Do you sometimes take photos of yourself?). See what students most often take photos of. - Students works in groups to do the task.

FI CI A

L

• Đối với động từ có 2 âm tiết kết thúc bằng “Nguyên âm + Phụ âm”, nhưng trọng âm rơi vào âm tiết thứ 2 => gấp đôi phụ âm + "ed" (prefer => preferred) • Nhưng động từ 2 âm tiết có kết thúc “nguyên âm + phụ âm”, mà trọng âm ở vần đầu (không phải vần cuối như trường hợp ở trên), thì ta chỉ thêm "ed" vào cuối mà không gấp đôi phụ âm. (enter => entered) + Động từ tận cùng bằng "y" • Động từ tận cùng bằng "y", trước "y" là nguyên âm ( u, e, o, a, i) => chỉ thêm "ed". (play => played) • Động từ tận cùng bằng "y", trước "y" là phụ âm => bỏ "y" + đuôi "ied". (study => studied)

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.52). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Lesson 3: Language focus

FI CI A

• Past simple: affirmative and negative

L

UNIT 7: GROWING UP

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about situations and events in the past. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents GAME: Past tense game

(https://www.gamestolearnenglish.com/past-tense-game/)

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: To revise some verbs in past tense. ❖ Contents: Students play game “Past tense game”. ❖ Products: Some verbs in past tense. ❖ Organization: - Teacher guides students to play the game. There are 3 different tasks in the game. In the first task, students simply have to drag the verbs to match present to past tense forms. The second task requires students to choose the correct word to complete the sentence. Finally, for the third task students have to re-order the phrase. - Students play the game in two teams. The winner is the team who get more score than another one.

 Language point PAST SIMPLE AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE


L

FI CI A

Form: → Affirmative form: (+) S + V2 /-ed Ex: He enjoyed being a student. We went to Spain for our holidays. → Negative form: (-) S + didn’t + V-bare Ex: I didn't see you yesterday. They didn't go to Spain this year.

NH

- Students listen carefully and copy down into their notebooks.

OF

- Teacher explains the usage of the past simple tense and the affirmative / negative in past simple tense. Show students how to distinguish between them.

Usage: We use the past simple tense to talk about: • something that happened once in the past. Ex: I met my wife in 1983. • something that happened several times in the past. Ex: When I was a boy, I walked a mile to school every day. • something that was true for some time in the past: Ex: I lived abroad for ten years. • we often use expressions with ago with the past simple: Ex: I met my wife a long time ago.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students know the past simple tense and distinguish between the past simple affirmative and negative. ❖ Contents: Students work individually. ❖ Products: Language point about the affirmative and negative in past simple tense. ❖ Organization:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: - Students find the Rules, write the opposite forms of the sentences, complete the text and the conversation with the correct form of verbs. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the examples and the rule. - Students find more examples in the text (page 88). - Teacher plays the grammar animation for student to check the answer. - Students check the answer individually. - Teacher elecit the language note about the usage of the irregular verbs in the negative form of the past simple.

1. Study the examples. Find other examples of the negative form in the text. How do we form the past simple negative? Read the Rule to check.

Suggested answers didn’t want, didn’t change  Language note - Irregular verbs behave in the same way as regular verbs in the negative form of the past simple. They use the base form of the verb, not the irregular past simple form. Ex: He didn’t take a photo. NOT He didn’t took a photo.


L

FI CI A

OF

3. Complete the text with the affirmative or negative form of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. acted 2. didn’t make 3. didn’t go 4. gave 5. didn’t have 6. loved 7. had

NH

Exercise 3: - Students complete the text with the correct verb forms. - Teacher reminds students that for the affirmative verbs they need to think about whether they are regular or irregular. Check answers with the class.

2. Write the opposite forms of the sentences. Suggested answers 1. I didn’t read a book last night. 2. My brother started a new school last year. 3. We didn’t play basketball yesterday. 4. My cousin didn’t give me a present for my birthday. 5. I liked playing football when I was young. 6. My best friend went on holiday last year.

ƠN

Exercise 2: - Teacher go through the example with the class and show how the verb changes form. - Students work in pairs for support if needed. - Teacher check answers by reading out the original sentence and eliciting the answer from the class.

M

QU Y

4. Complete the conversation with the correct form of the verbs in the box. Exercise 4: Suggested answers - Teacher completes the first gap with the class, 1. had helping them to find the correct verb in the box. 2. loved - Students complete the rest of the activity in 3. didn’t like pairs. 4. wanted - Teacher asks two volunteers to read out the 5. didn’t have completed dialogue. 6. got 7. started

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the language point about the simple past tense in affirmative and negative form. ❖ Contents: Students write their experiences and then share with their partner. ❖ Products: Students’ sentences. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Students complete the sentences with their own ideas.

5. Write about your experiences. Use the affirmative or negative form of the verbs. Suggested answers 1. I lived / didn’t live 2. I had / didn’t have 3. I liked / didn’t like


L

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your sentences in exercise 5.

OF

Exercise 6: - Teacher asks students to compare their answers in pairs. - Students work in pair then share the answer. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class something they learned about their partner.

4. I went / didn’t go 5. I saw / didn’t see 6. I watched / didn’t watch 7. I played / didn’t play 8. I visited / didn’t visit 9. I ate / didn’t eat

FI CI A

- Teacher asks one or two students to read out some of their sentences.

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.49). - Prepare new lesson.

NH

ƠN

* Finished - Teacher refers fast finishers to the Finished? Finished? Write about what you did last activity. weekend. - Students can write their sentences individually (Students’ own answers) and compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks them to read their sentences to the class, omitting the verbs. See if other students can complete the sentences with the correct verb forms.

DẠ

Y

M

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening

FI CI A

• Life events

L

UNIT 7. GROWING UP

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - listen for specific biographical information. - develop students’ listening skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game: Draw a monster ❖ Aims: Get students into the right mood for learning the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students play game “Draw a monster” then answer the question. ❖ Products: Students’ answer. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to take out a piece of paper and a pencil. Show the video. - Students must read the sentences which are describing the appearance of a monster. - After reading about the monster’s physical appearance, teacher pauses the video and asks students to try to draw the monster based on that description. Once students have finished their drawing, press play on the video to reveal what the monster looks like (https://youtu.be/MgGEcD39Es8) and compare the students’ drawings to the monster in the video.


L

FI CI A

OF 1. Read the text about Robert Wadlow and check the meanings of the phrases in blue. Write the past simple form of the verbs. Listen and check.  New words - grow up – grew up (v) - go to school – went to school (v) - leave school – left school (v) - go to university – went to university (v) - get a qualification – got a qualification (v) - get a job – got a job (v) - get married – got married (v) - have children – had children (v) - travel – travelled (v) - die – died (v)

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: To presents new words. ❖ Contents: Students listen and repeat new words individual/pairs/groups then do the task to practice. ❖ Products: Students can understand, remember and use the new words. ❖ Organization: Pre-listening Exercise 1: - Teacher focus on the photos and the table. Ask students to imagine how tall Robert was. - Students read the text, ignoring the gaps, and try to work out the meanings of the verbs and phrases in blue. - Teacher check answers, and check that students understand all the verbs and phrases. - Students write the past simple forms. - Teacher plays the audio for them to listen and check.

 THINK! Do you know any very tall people? What are the good and bad things about being very tall? (Students’ own answer)

ƠN

- Teacher gives comment and pick up a picture from a student who draw like most. - Students play game individually. - Teacher reads out the questions and elicit answers from individual students. Ask more questions to encourage students to say more, (e.g. In what situations is it useful to be very tall? In what situations is it a problem?) - Students work in pairs to do the task.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students improve their listening skill and apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs/groups ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization While-listening Exercise 2: - Teacher reads out the question and elicit a few possible answers. Encourage students to predict and speculate, and point out that this

2. Do you think people in the USA liked or disliked Robert? Listen to a podcast about him and check your answer. Suggested answers People liked him.


ƠN

OF

Suggested answers 1. 1918 2. two brothers 3. two sisters 4. normal 5. seventeen 6. spoke 7. 800 8. twenty-two 9. feet

FI CI A

L

3. Read the Skills Strategy. Then listen again and complete 1–9 in the text.

Optional activity 1. Robert was taller than his father by the age of six. 2. At school, they made a special desk for him. 3. Robert left university because it was difficult for him. 4. Robert never stopped growing.

Y

M

QU Y

NH

can help them understand a listening text better. Play the audio. - Students listen and check their answers. Exercise 3: - Students read the skills strategy before doing exercise 3. - Teacher allows students time to read the gapped sentences again. Read out each gapped sentence in turn and elicit what kind of information is missing, (e.g. a name, number, date, etc). Play the audio again. - Students listen and complete the text. - Teacher plays the audio again, if necessary, for students to check and complete their answers. Check answers with the class. Optional activity: - Teacher dictates these sentences to the class, or write them on the board: 1. Robert was taller than his father by the age of eight. 2. At school, they made a special chair for him. 3. Robert left university because he didn’t enjoy it. 4. Robert stopped growing when he was 18. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen to the audio and do the task individually. - Teacher asks students to listen again and correct the sentences. Check answers with the class Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to write sentences about a person in their family. Encourage them to write both affirmative and negative sentences. - Students do the task individually. - Teacher asks some students to read some of their sentences to the class. Correct any errors.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs.

4. Write sentences about a person in your family. Use the past simple form of the verbs in the text. Ex: He grew up in Hue (Students’ own answer )


L

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Compare your sentences in exercise 4.

FI CI A

❖ Products: Students’ talking. ❖ Organization: Post-listening Exercise 5: - Teacher asks two students to read out the examples. Point out that we use Really? to express surprise. - Students compare their sentences in pairs. - Teacher asks some students to tell the class something they learned about their partner.

(Students’ own answer )

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.50). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 7. GROWING UP

FI CI A

• Past simple: questions

L

Lesson 5: Language focus

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask questions about events in the past. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson: Contents

Chatting:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: To remind students about the past simple tense and present the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Teacher and students chat together. ❖ Products: The past simple tense. ❖ Organization: - With books closed, teacher asks what students can remember about Robert Wadlow. Ask questions to elicit more information. Teacher writes one or two questions on the board and elicit possible answers. - Students answer. Students can open their books to check the answers. - Teacher focuses on the questions on the board and ask students what tense they are in - Students answer. - Teacher tells students they are going to learn about questions in the past simple now.

T: - What can you remember about Robert Wadlow? - Where did he grow up? - At what age did he leave school? - Did he travel much? Sts: (Students’ own answer)


L

FI CI A

OF

NH

Exercise 1: - Students complete the table with the questions from page 90. - Teacher checks answers, and asks which word is in all the questions. Play the grammar animation. - Students observe the animation. - Teacher elecits the language point and language note. - Students listen carefully and then copy down into their notebooks.

1. Look at the questions about Robert Wadlow in the text on page 90 again and complete the table. Which word is in all of the questions? Suggested answers 1. Did 2. have 3. he 4. How 5. people 6. did 7. die - The word did is in all the questions.  Language point → Question form: (?) Did + S + V-bare…? Ex: Did he see you yesterday? Did they go to Spain this year?  Language note - We use do / does to form questions in the present simple, and we use did in the past simple: Ex: What do you do? What did you do? - The form did is the same for all persons, and it comes before the subject. Ex: Did he grow up in Alton? (NOT He did grow up in Alton?)

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand how to make the question form of the past simple tense. ❖ Contents: Students complete the table and answer the question. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding. ❖ Organization:

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students order the words to make past simple questions, write questions, ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to order the words to make questions, leaving out the extra word in each sentence. - Students work in pairs to do the task. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Exercise 3: - Teacher reads out the first sentence of information and elicits the correct question. - Students read the remaining information and

2. Order the words to make past simple questions. There is one extra word in each sentence. Suggested answers 1. Did you grow up here? 2. Where did he live? 3. Did he get a job? 4. How did they travel? 5. When did he finish? 3. Read the information about the Vietnamese scholar Lê Quý Đôn. Write questions using the words in blue. Suggested answers 1. When did he live? 2. Who was he?


3. Where did Lê Quý Đôn go as an ambassador in 1760? 4. Was he the principal of the National University situated in the Văn Miếu in Hà Nội? 5. Did he have a few works of the old Exercise 4: Vietnamese literature? - Teacher reads out the task and demonstrate 6. How old was he when he passed away in by thinking of teacher’s own ideas to complete 1784? the paragraph. Get students to ask teacher 7. What do they do in many places in Việt Nam? questions to guess the information. Teacher can only answer “Yes, I did” or “No, I didn’t”. 4. Look at the paragraph. Complete the parts Students can have a maximum of 20 questions. in blue with your ideas. Then work in pairs. - Students then complete their paragraphs Ask questions (a maximum of twenty) to find individually. the information in your partner’s paragraph. - Teacher puts students into pairs to ask and You can only answer ‘Yes, I did’ or ‘No, I answer questions. didn't’. (Students’ own answer) ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way to use the questions form of the past simple 5. USE IT! Complete the questions with the tense. past simple form of the verbs. Then ask and ❖ Contents: Students complete the answer the questions with a partner. questions, then ask and answer the questions Suggested answers with their partner. 1. Did you live here when you were younger? ❖ Products: Students’ speaking. 2. What did you do last weekend? ❖ Organization: 3. When did you last go to the cinema? Exercise 5: 4. What film did you see? - Teacher asks students to complete the 5. Who did you go with? questions in pairs. (With stronger classes, 6. Did you do any sports last weekend? students could add one or two more questions 7. Did you play any video games yesterday? of their own to ask a partner). 8. Did you have fun on your last holiday? - Students work in pairs to do the task, then (Students’ own answers) ask and answer the questions. * Finished  Finished? What is the longest question that - Teacher refers fast finishers to the Finished? you can make using the past simple? activity. (Students’ own answer) - Students write their questions individually, then compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks fast finishers to read their questions to the class. Ask the class to listen to see whose is the longest.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

write the questions. - Teacher checks the answers.

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook p.51).


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Lesson 6: Speaking

FI CI A

• Role-play: an interview with a famous person

L

UNIT 7. GROWING UP

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - role-play an interview with a famous person - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students get comfortable with classmates and focus their brains on content of the new lesson. ❖ Contents: ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads the question with the class and elicit a range of questions that students could ask their favourite singer or actor. - Students answer. - Teacher writes some possible questions on  THINK! Imagine that you can interview the board. Then present the new lesson. your favourite singer or actor. What questions do you want to ask? ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION (Students’ own answers) ❖ Aims: Help students pay attention to the content of the dialogue.


L

FI CI A

OF

2. Look at the Key Phrases. Which does the interviewer use and which does the pop star use? Then watch or listen and check your answers.

Suggested answers Interviewer: 1, 4, 6 Pop star: 2, 3, 5

3. Practise the dialogue with a partner.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students develop their speaking skill to interview with a famous person. ❖ Contents: Students practise the dialogue with a partner. ❖ Products: Students’ performance ❖ Organization While-speaking Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to practise the dialogue from exercise 1. - Students work in pairs to do the task. Exercise 4: - Teacher reads the study strategy with the class. Ask students to look at the situation. - Students work individually or in pairs to think of follow-up questions for 1–5 in the table. - Teacher elicits possible questions from students. With weaker classes, teacher could do this as a brainstorming session with the whole class. Optional activity:

1. Complete the dialogue with sentences a–d. Then watch or listen and check. Where is the pop star from?  New words Suggested answers 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b The pop star is from Texas / the USA

ƠN

❖ Contents: Students complete the dialogue then look at the key phrases and answer the question. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding. ❖ Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to read the gapped interview and complete it with the correct sentences a–d. - Students do as required. - Teacher plays the video or audio for students to listen and check their answers. Exercise 2: - Students find the key phrases in the interview and note down who says each one. - Teacher plays the video or audio again for students to listen and check their answers. Then check answers with the class and check that students understand all the key phrases.

4. Read the Study Strategy. Look at the situation and then think of some follow-up questions for 1–5 in the table. (Students’ own answers)


FI CI A OF ƠN

5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Prepare and practise interviews with a famous person. Use the Key Phrases, the Study Strategy and ideas from the list below.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way to order food and drink in a café. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs. ❖ Products: Students’ conversation. ❖ Organization: Post-speaking Exercise 5: - Students work in pairs to choose a famous person and prepare and practise an interview with them. - Teacher encourages students to use their imagination, and tell them their interview doesn’t have to be completely serious! Ask some pairs to perform their interviews for the class. Tell them not to mention the name of the person. See if other students can guess the famous people from the interviews. Optional activity: - Teacher refers students back to the questions in exercise 5 on page 92. Put them with a new partner and ask them to ask and answer the questions again. This time they should use a range of words and phrases to react to what their partner is saying, and they should ask more questions to find out more information. Ask students to report back on how interested their partner sounded when they were listening and reacting. - Students do as directed.

L

- Teacher play the interview again, pausing after the key phrases and the words and phrases in exercise 4. Get students to repeat the words and phrases, copying the intonation on the recording. Point out to students that they can use intonation to sound interested when they are listening to someone. - Students listen carefully and repeat the intonation words/phrases.

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the structures. - Do exercises (in workbook p.107).

(Students’ own answers)


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 7. GROWING UP

FI CI A

• A description of a person

L

Lesson 7: Writing

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - describe a person’s physical appearance and behaviour. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson: Contents

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study. ❖ Contents: Students ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks the questions to the class and elicit answers from individual students. Encourage students to share their knowledge and talk about celebrities they are interested in. Ask more questions to encourage them to speak more, (e.g. Why do you like / admire this person? Where did you find out this information about them? Do you enjoy learning about celebrities’ lives? Why? / Why not?) - Students work in pairs to answer the questions.

 THINK! Who is your favourite celebrity? Can you describe him / her? (Students’ own answers)


OF

FI CI A

L

1. Read the article and look at the words in blue. What do we use them for?  New words - famous (a) - best known (a) - strong (a) - good-looking (a) - busy (a) - spend lots of time outdoors (v.phr) - superhero (n) Suggested answers To describe a person’s physical appearance and behaviour

ƠN

2. Complete the Key Phrases with words in the description.

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students know some words to describe a person’s physical appearance and behaviour. ❖ Contents: Students read the article and answer the question. Complete the Key phrases. ❖ Products: Students can remember, understand, and use the given words. ❖ Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to read the article, look at the blue words and answer the question. - Students do as required. Exercise 2: - Students complete the key phrases with words from the article. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help student know how to use the punctuation correctly. ❖ Contents: Students match to complete the sentences about punctuation, then rewrite the text with the correct punctuation. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization While-writing Exercise 3: - Students match the sentence halves. - Teacher checks answers with the class and check that students understand how to use the different punctuation marks. Discuss any differences in punctuation between English and the students’ own language. Exercise 4: - Students rewrite the text with the correct punctuation, then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers by getting students in turn to come and write a sentence from the

Suggested answers 1. famous 2. best-known / the role(s) in … 3. tall/ strong/ good-looking 4. fair hair, blue eyes, a beard and a moustache. 5. busy/ spends a lot of time outdoors with … 6. superhero 3. Match 1–7 with a–g to complete the sentences.  Language point: Punctuation Suggested answers 1. f 2. d 3. a 4. b 5. g 6. c 7. E 4. Rewrite the text with the correct punctuation. Suggested answers Jennifer Lawrence is an American actor. She was born in Kentucky. She is tall and she’s got blonde hair and blue eyes. Jennifer’s most


FI CI A

L

famous role was a girl called Katniss Everdeen in The Hunger Games.

OF

Optional activity 1. That was an amazing film! 2. I’ve seen the first, second and third film in the series. 3. Who played Harry in the Harry Potter films? 4. Where was Robert Wadlow’s hometown?

ƠN

text on the board with the correct punctuation. Optional activity - For extra punctuation practise, dictate the following sentences and questions to the class: 1. That was an amazing film! 2. I’ve seen the first, second and third film in the series. 3. Who played Harry in the Harry Potter films? 4. Where was Robert Wadlow’s hometown? - Teacher tells students to think carefully about the punctuation as they write them. - Students listen carefully and write correctly. - Teacher checks answers by writing the sentences on the board. See if students can remember the answers to the two questions.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION 5. USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to guide. write a description of a person. ❖ Contents: Students write a description of a celebrity. ❖ Products: Students’ writing. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher reads the task with the class. - Students plan their questions and answers and write their article. This can be set for homework. - Teacher reminds students to check their grammar, spelling and punctuation carefully.

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook p.41). - Prepare new lesson.

(Students’ own answers)

DẠ

Y

* Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 7. GROWING UP

FI CI A

• Language and literature: The Adventures of Tom Sawyer

L

Lesson 8: CLIL

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - read and understand an extract from a work of literature. - develop students’ knowledge about literature and their language. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a chara cter, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1.Check – up: during the lesson 2.New lesson: Contents GAME: Jigsaw puzzle

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP ❖ Aims: Present the author “Mark Twain” and his work of literature. ❖ Contents: Students play game jigsaw. ❖ Products: Mark Twain’s picture and background knowledge. ❖ Organization: - Teacher prepares 4 worksheets of Jigsaw puzzle game. Then, divides class into 4 groups. And guide students how to play it. - Students listen, arrange the pieces of jigsaw puzzle in the correct place to make a picture. The winner is the group who make the correct picture fastest. - Teacher declares the winner and point to the picture, ask student: “Who is he?” - Students answer.

=> Mark Twain * Background: The Adventures of Tom Sawyer was written by the American writer Mark Twain and first published in 1876. The novel tells the story of Tom’s adventures with a group of friends, which include spending time on Jackson’s Island. While they are on the island, Tom becomes aware that the boys’ families believe they have drowned in


L

FI CI A

OF

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box and complete the sentences.  New words - pipe (n) - sleep out (v) - the dark (n) - run away (v) Suggested answers 1. the dark 2. run away 3. pipe 4. sleep out

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students can understand, remember and use the new words in an extract from a work of literature. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to check the meanings of the words. ❖ Products: Students’ understanding and their answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Students work in pairs to check the meanings of the words in their dictionaries. - Teacher models pronunciation of the words, if necessary. And check students understand all the words. - Students read the text and complete it with the correct words. They compare answers in pairs. - Teacher plays the audio. - Students listen and read, checking their answers.

the river. He decides to return home just in time for his own funeral. Huckleberry Finn, mentioned in the extract, appears as the main character in a later novel by Twain: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, published in 1884.

ƠN

-Teacher gives students some more information about Mark Twain and his work of literature “The adventures of Tom Sawyer”.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students understand an extract from a work of literature more. ❖ Contents: Students read the text again and do the task. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization Exercise 2: - Teacher allows students time to read through the questions. - Students read the text and answer the questions. They can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Exercise 3: - Students read and listen to the text and find a person or place to match each sentence.

2. Read the text. Then answer the questions. Suggested answers 1. He was scared / he saw Injun Joe’s face in the dark. 2. He wanted to get away / do something exciting. 3. Three (Tom, Joe, Huck) 4. On Jackson’s Island. 5. They thought it was very good / the best dinner in the world. 3. Read and listen to the text. Find a person or place for sentences 1–4. Suggested answers


DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Draw a map - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

L

FI CI A

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. What did Tom and his friends do the next day? Write a short paragraph. Then compare with another pair.

OF

The next day the boys got up at 8 a.m. Then they … (Students’ own answers)

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate about the time in the different cities. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. ❖ Products: Students’ conversation. ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher reads out the example beginning of the next paragraph and elicit some ideas about what the boys did the next day, (e.g. looked for food, caught some fish, built a shelter). Ask questions to encourage students to think about how the story continued, (e.g. Do you think they slept well? How did they feel in the morning?) - Students work in pairs to write a short paragraph. - Teacher puts pairs together into groups of four to compare their paragraphs. Ask some pairs to tell the class what was similar in their paragraphs and what was different.

1. Muff Potter / Injun Joe 2. Mississippi River 3. Jackson’s Island 4. Huck Finn

ƠN

- Teacher checks answers with the class.


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 7. GROWING UP

L

Lesson 9: Options

FI CI A

Puzzles and games

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all knowledge in Unit 7. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: - Solve all games and puzzles individually and in groups. - Self – revise all the lessons that have been learned. II./. PREPARATION 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./. PROCEDURE 1. Check – up: during the lesson 2. New lesson:

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP 1. Read the sentences and complete the table. ❖ Aims: Help students get comfortable with Then draw the men’s faces. classmates and focus their brains on content Suggested answers of the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students read the sentences and complete the table. Then draw the men’s faces. ❖ Products: Students’ drawing. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher reads out the first sentence and point out the example answer in the chart. - Students work individually or in pairs to read the sentences and complete the chart, then draw the three faces. - With stronger classes, teacher could do this as a race. Check answers with the class and see whose drawings are the most accurate.


NH

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students revise the past simple tense. ❖ Contents: Students play games. ❖ Products: Students’ speaking using the past simple tense. ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: 2. PAST SIMPLE TENSE. Play in pairs. - Teacher demonstrates the activity with a Follow the instructions. confident student, then put students into pairs to play the game. Set a time limit and ask students to note down how many past simple forms they manage to say correctly within the time. See which pair managed to say the most. To make it more challenging, students could say a sentence using a past simple form rather than just saying the verb, (e.g. eat – I ate a banana; watch – I watched TV). Teacher could play this version of the game with the whole class, with students racing to (Students’ own answers) put their hands up to say a sentence as each verb is suggested. - Students listen carefully and play the game.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can use the vocabulary which they have learnt in Unit 7 to do the tasks given as well as develop their skills. ❖ Contents: Students play game to find the object pronouns and unscramble the words to 3. WORDSNAKE. Find seven object find five life events. pronouns. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization Exercise 3: - Students find the object pronouns in the wordsnake. - With stronger classes, teacher could do this as a race. Check answers with the class. Teacher could elicit one or two example sentences using the object pronouns. Alternatively, ask students to write the corresponding subject pronouns. - Students play the game in individually.


L

FI CI A

OF 5. FIND SOMEONE WHO … . Walk around the class and ask questions. Write a different name for each question. Find someone who …

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have revised. ❖ Contents: Students play the game. ❖ Products: Students’ speaking. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher reads out the instructions and explain to students that they must find a different person to answer ‘yes’ to each of the questions. With weaker classes, go through the chart and elicit the questions that students should ask, (e.g. Did you eat pizza yesterday?). - Students listen to the teacher’s guide carefully and then do the task given. Stand up and walk around the classroom. They must only ask one question to each classmate they come across then move on. - Teacher monitor while students are working and make sure they are asking and answering their questions in English. Continue until one student has filled in all the names.

4. Unscramble the words to find five life events. Suggested answers 1. get a job 2. grow up 3. leave school 4. go to university 5. have children

ƠN

Exercise 4: - Teacher has students unscramble the words to find the life events. - With weaker classes, students could work in pairs for this activity. With stronger classes, students could do it as a race. - Teacher check answers with the class. As an extension, teacher could ask students to choose two more life events from page 90 and write them as scrambled words. - Students can swap with a partner and try to unscramble them.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook).


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

FI CI A

Means of transport

L

Lesson 1: Vocabulary

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - talk about means of transport. - develop students’ speaking and listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! How do you travel when you go on ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm what holiday? they are going to study. ❖ Contents: Students answer the questions about some means of transport. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks the questions to the whole class and reads through the means of transport in the box with the class. Check that students distinguish between train, tram, trolleybus and subway train. Elicit a few answers, then put students into pairs to More question: discuss the question. 1. Can you go by subway train in Việt Nam? - Students work in pairs to discuss the 2. Do you have ferries in your town? question. 3. Where can you see a tram or a trolleybus? - Teacher asks some pairs to tell the class 4. Why do some people go by train, but not by by what means they both go on holiday. plane? … - Student present in front of the class. (Students’ own answers.)


OF ƠN

 New words - ferry (n): a boat which ferries people, cars etc from one place to another ( phà) - tram (n) : a long car running on rails and usually driven by electric power, for carrying passengers especially along the streets of a town ( xe chạy bằng điện) - subway train (n): tàu điện ngầm - trolleybus (n): a bus which is driven by power from an overhead wire to which it is connected. (xe điện) - cable car (n): a vehicle that moves up and down a mountain ( cáp treo) Suggested answers. 1. bus 2. Plane 3. ferry 4. tram 5. subway train 6. trolleybus 7. cable car 8. Ship 9. train 10. boat

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Teacher presents new words related to means of transport. ❖ Contents: Students match the words with the photos. ❖ Products: Students’ matching. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to look at the means of transport and match the words with the photos. - Students do the task and they can use their dictionaries to help, if necessary. (With weaker classes, students could work in pairs or small groups for this. With stronger classes, teacher could do it as a race.) - Teacher plays the audio to check their answers. - Students check their answers. - Teacher gives the meaning of some new words through the photos and asks students to repeat. - Students listen and repeat.

FI CI A

L

- Teacher asks further questions to encourage students to say more, for example: ? “Can you go by subway train in Việt Nam? Do you have ferries in your town? Where can you see a tram or a trolleybus? Why do some people go by train, but not 1. Look and match photos 1 - 10 with the words by plane? …” in the box. Listen and check. - Students answer on their own.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can apply the knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students answer the questions and do the quiz. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization:


Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to do the quiz individually then compare their answers with a partner. - Students work individually. - Teacher checks answers with the class and sees who got all the answers right.

L

2. Which means of transport have you got in your country?

FI CI A

Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to discuss in pairs or small groups which means of transport from exercise 1 they have got in their town or in Việt Nam. - Students discuss in pairs. - Teacher asks some pairs to tell the class which means they choose both. - Students present in front of the class.

(Students’ own answers.)

OF

3. Work in pairs. Do the Travel Quiz and compare your answers.

3. c 7. b

4. b 8. b

QU Y

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to focus on the means of transport in exercise 1 again and complete the Key Phrases . Play the video or audio. - Students watch or listen and write the means of transport from exercise 1 which the people mention. ( With weaker classes, students could work in pairs or small groups for this activity.) - Teacher check answer with the class.

ƠN

Suggested answers. 1. c 2. a 5. b 6. b

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Students can talk about their means of transport. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups. ❖ Products: Student’s working. ❖ Organization: Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to read through the two holidays and make sure students understand everything. Put them into groups and ask them to choose which holiday to discuss. - Students work individually within their groups and suggest the means of

4. Listen and complete the Key Phrases. Suggested answers. 1. holiday 2. means of transport 3. boat 4. plane 5. subway train

5. USE IT! Work in groups. Imagine that you are going on holiday. Choose holiday A or B. Which means of transport should you choose? Why?


FI CI A

L

transport. - Teacher asks students to use their own ideas to discuss in their groups, showing the reasons why they choose the means of transport. Ask groups in turn to tell the class what they decided.

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Finished? - Teacher says: “You use this to travel from one place to another in a city in Việt  Finished? Nam.” Elicit the word (bus). Put students Think of more means of transport you often see into pairs to write three more clues for the in your town or your countryside. Make a list. items on page 96, then ask them to close their books. Put pairs together into groups of four to read their clues to each other and guess the items. - Students do as requested and they can repeat in a different group for more practice. - Teacher sees which pair guessed all the words correctly. - Students can write their lists and then compare with another fast finisher. - Alternatively, teacher asks them to read their lists to the class. Explain any words (Students’ own answers.) that students do not know, and ask other students if they also choose the same means of transport. ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all the new words. -Prepare for next lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

L

Lesson 2: Reading

FI CI A

Summer holidays

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for detailed information. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! What do you normally do in the ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm what summer holidays? they are going to study. ❖ Contents: Students answer what they normally do in the summer holidays. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads the question with the class and asks more questions to give students more ideas to talk about, for example: ? “Do you go away with your family? More questions: Where do you go? 1. Do you go away with your family? What do you like doing on holiday? 2. Where do you go? If you stay at home do you get bored? 3. What do you like doing on holiday? What do you do with your friends?” 4. If you stay at home do you get bored? - Teacher puts students into small groups to 5. What do you do with your friends?” discuss their answers. - Students work in groups. ( Students’ own answers.) - Teacher asks some students to tell the class something they learned about one of their classmates.


L

OF

FI CI A

1. Read the text and write C (Ciara), M (Martin) or J (Jason).

ƠN

 New words - Eiffel Tower (n): Tháp Eiffel - cave (n): hang động - bay (n): vịn Suggested answers. 1. C 2. M 4. M 5. J

3. J 6. C

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students identify the situation and get detailed information. ❖ Contents: Students read for detailed information to match each sentence to one of the people. ❖ Products: Students can match each sentence to one of the people. ❖ Organization: Pre-reading Exercise 1: - Teacher uses the photos to teach some new words. Drill pronunciation then ask students to repeat. - Students listen and repeat. - Teacher allows students time to read sentences 1-6. Explain that they must read for detailed information to match each sentence to one of the people. - Students read and answer the questions. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students read and listen carefully for detail information. ❖ Contents: Students make True/False statements and get the meaning of the words. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: While-reading Exercise 2: - Teacher reads through the sentences with the class. Point out that for this task students need to read and listen carefully for specific information. They shouldn’t use prior information. ( With stronger classes, teacher could ask students to correct the false sentences.) - Students make True/False statements and they can compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Optional activity: Reading

2. Read and listen to the text and write True or False. Suggested answers. 1. False (Ciara is going to spend a week in Paris.) 2. False (They are going to learn how to play tennis with a new sports teacher.) 3. True  Optional activity: Reading 1. How does Ciara know that Paris is expensive? 2. Where is Martin going to learn to play tennis?


L

FI CI A

3. VOCABULARY PLUS. Use a dictionary to check the meanings of the adjectives in blue in the text. (Students’ own answers.)

 Optional activity: Vocabulary Plus 1. unamazing 2. cheap 3. uncool 4. unimpressive 5. interesting 6. old

QU Y

NH

Optional activity: Vocabulary Plus - Teacher writes these adjectives on the board and asks students to match the blue adjectives in the text to their opposites 1–6. - Students work in pairs to match the blue adjectives in the text to their opposites 1–6. - Teacher checks answers with the class and checks that students understand all the adjectives. Point out the prefix un- in unamazing and explain that with some adjectives we can form an opposite by adding un-. Elicit or give one or two more examples, for example: unhappy, unlucky.

Suggested answers. 1. From reading her guidebook 2. At school 3. Because it is magnificent inside the caves

OF

Post-reading Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to check the meanings of the adjectives in blue. Discuss the meanings with the class. Teacher could ask students to translate the words into their own language to check understanding. - Students work in pair to find out the meaning of blue words.

3. Why is Jason going to take some photos with his friends?

ƠN

- Teacher writes these questions on the board and asks students to work in pairs. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work in groups to talk about which holiday they prefer: Ciara’s, Martin’s or Jason’s ❖ Products: Students’ presentation. ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher allows students time to prepare their answers to the questions individually. - Students discuss the questions in pairs.

Suggested answers. 1. awesome 2. expensive 4. magnificent 5. boring

3. cool 6. new

4. USE IT! Work in groups. Which holiday do you prefer, Ciara’s, Martin’s or Jason’s? Why? Where did you go on your last holiday? What did you do?


L More questions: 1. What about sports? 2. Is there a swimming pool? 3. Did you go there last summer? 4. What about music and drama? 5. Are there any festivals?

OF

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

FI CI A

- Teacher asks some students to tell the class something they learned about their partner. Discuss as a class what there is to do in the students’ own town or city in the summer. Ask more questions to encourage them to say more, for example: ? “What about sports? Is there a swimming pool? Did you go there last summer? What about music and drama? Are there any festivals?”

ƠN

(Students’ own answers.)

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 3: Language focus • be going to: affirmative, negative and questions • will and won't

L

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about future plans and intentions. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Brainstorm ❖ Aims: Teacher elicits the information from students about the last lesson, then leads in the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students recall what they have studied from the last lesson. ❖ Products: Students’ sentences. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their book - They’re going to spend a week in Paris. and asks students what they can remember about the summer plans on page 98. Elicit ideas and write sentences with be going to on the board. - Students give answers. - Teacher focuses on the sentences and asks: ? “Do they refer to the past, present or future?” (future). - They’re going to visit some caves in Hạ Long - Students answer. Bay. - Teacher underlines the verb in each sentence and tell students they are going to learn how to talk about future plans.


L

FI CI A

OF

 Form: (+) S + am/ is/ are + going to + V (-) S + am/ is/ are + not + going to + V (?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + going to + V ? Yes, S + am/ is/ are No, S + am/ isn’t/ aren’t Suggested answers. 1. going to 2. ’m not 3. are Rules: 1. future 2. be

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the structures they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to complete the sentences with the correct forms of be going to. - Students complete the sentences then compare their answers in pairs. - Teacher checks the answers.

1. Look at the text on page 98 again and complete the examples. Then choose the correct words in Rules 1–2.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the rules of be going to. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the teacher’s guide and do exercise. ❖ Products: Students can understand the Rules. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students look back at the text and complete the examples. - Students complete the examples. - Teacher checks answers, then reads through the Rules with the class and elicits the correct words to complete them. - Students complete the Rules. - Teacher plays the grammar animation and writes the form of be going to.

Suggested answers. 1. ’re going to visit 2. aren’t going to travel 3. ’s going to buy 4. ’m not going to take 5. ’re going to stay 6. isn’t going to study 3. PRONUNCIATION: Question stress and rhythm. Listen and repeat the questions. Underline the stressed words in each question.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher plays the example and points out how the underlined words are stressed (said slightly louder and with more intonation). - Students pay attention. - Teacher plays the audio once, then plays it again, pausing for students to underline the stressed words. - Students listen and underline the stressed words. - Teacher checks answers and plays the audio

2. Complete the sentences with the affirmative or negative form of be going to and the verbs in brackets.

Suggested answers.


1. Are you going to buy a torch? 2. What are we going to see? 3. How is she going to travel? 4. Are we going to stay in a tent?

Exercise 4: - Teacher writes on the board: It will be sunny tomorrow. It won’t be hot. Underline will and won’t. Ask: ? “Are these sentences about plans?” (no) “Are they predictions about the future?” (yes) - Teacher tells students they are going to learn how to make predictions in English. Read the examples with the class, then go through the rules and elicit the correct words to complete them. - Students complete the Rules in pairs. - Teacher plays the grammar animation.

4. Look at the examples and complete Rules 1– 4. Example: It will be sunny tomorrow. It won’t be hot

FI CI A

OF ƠN

NH QU Y

Suggested answers. 1. will, ’ll 2. won’t

Y

M

Exercise 5: - Teacher asks students to read out the example question and answer, then read out the next prompt and teacher elicits the question and answer. - Students read the example. - Teacher asks students to write questions and answers about Nick’s future. - Students write the remaining questions and answers. - Teacher checks answers by asking pairs of students to read out the questions and answers.

DẠ

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the structures.

L

again, pausing for students to repeat.

3. will

4. will / won’t

5. Nick and his family are going to move from London to Australia. Write questions and answers about his future. Suggested answers. 1. Will Nick’s family live in a big house? No, they won’t. 2. Will Nick make many new friends? Yes, he will. 3. Will Nick learn a new language? No, he won’t. 4. Will it be hot and sunny in December? Yes, it will. 5. Will Nick’s family have a barbecue on the beach in January? Yes, they will. 6. Will Nick’s friends in London visit him next summer? No, they won’t.


QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart all structures. -Prepare the next lesson.

L FI CI A

ƠN

OF

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Make five predictions about your partner's future. Say if you agree or not.

 Finished? Write predictions about your future.

NH

❖ Contents: Students make predictions about your partner's future. ❖ Products: Students’ working ❖ Organization: Exercise 6: - Teacher writes on the board: become famous, travel around the world. Elicit other ideas for things that might happen in the future, for example: win the lottery, live in another town or city, write a book. Put students into pairs. Ask them to make predictions about their partner’s future. - In pairs, students tell each other their predictions and respond. Finished? - Students can write their predictions individually and then read their predictions to the class, omitting will or won’t, for example: I ... get married. - Teacher sees if the class can guess the missing word. Ask: ? “Who is going to have the best future?”

DẠ

Y

M

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 4: Vocabulary and Listening Weather conditions

L

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - ask and answer about the weather. - develop students’ listening skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1. Teacher: book, planning, TV 2. Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1. Check – up : during the lesson. 2. New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! Do you like hot or cold weather? ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand How many different types of weather can you the situation and lead in new lesson. say in English? ❖ Contents: Students answer about what weather they like. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their books, and asks them if they prefer hot or cold weather: ? “Do you like hot or cold weather?” - Students answer on their own. - Teacher elicits a few answers from individual students. Encourage them to give reasons for their answers. Put students into pairs to think of as many weather words as they can in English: ? “How many different types of weather can (Students’ own answers.) you say in English?” - Students work in pair.


ƠN

OF

FI CI A

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box. What words can you match to photos 1–4? Listen and check.

 New words - icy (adj): very cold ( cóng) - cloudy (adj): covered with clouds ( có mây)

NH

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students identify the words related to the weather. ❖ Contents: Students match words with the photos. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Pre-listening Exercise 1: - Teacher ask students to use their dictionaries to check the meanings of the words in the box and match some of the words to the photos. - Students check the meanings and match some of the words to the photos. - Teacher plays the audio for students to listen and check. Check answers with the class. Point out the pronunciation of icy and cloudy.

L

- Teacher checks answers and writes the words on the board. Check that everyone understands all the words.

2. hot, sunny 4. foggy, cloudy, cold

2. Complete the texts with some of the words in exercise 1.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students practice asking and answering about the weather as well as improve listening skill. ❖ Contents: Students do the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: While-listening Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to read the texts and complete them with the correct weather words. - Students work in pairs to complete the texts. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Ask students which place they would most like to visit and why: ? “Which place would you like most to visit? Why?”

Suggested answers. 1. rainy, cloudy 3. cold, snowy, icy

Suggested answers. 1. rainy 2. hot 5. windy 6. foggy

3. cold 7. stormy

4. icy


L

FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers. She’s going to walk to the South Pole and study / take photos of the ice in Antarctica.

4. Read the Study Strategy. Then read the questions in exercise 5 carefully. Are there any answers you can guess now?

QU Y

NH

Exercise 4: - Teacher reads the Study Strategy with the class. Explain to students that “guessing before you listen gives you an idea of the kind of information you are listening for, so it helps you to focus when you listen”. Put students into pairs to read the questions and answers in exercise 5 and guess the answers. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher discusses some possible answers with the class, but do not confirm them at this stage.

3. Listen to an interview with explorer Stephanie Lowe. What do you think she is going to do in Antarctica? Listen and check your answer.

ƠN

Post-listening Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to focus on the photo of Stephanie and asks students what they think she is going to do in Antarctica. ? “What do you think she is going to do in Antarctica?” - Students answer the answer on their own. - Teacher elicits a few possible ideas, for example: study animals, learn about climate change. Play the audio for students to listen and check their answers.

M

Exercise 5: - Teacher plays the audio again for students to listen and choose the correct answers. - Students listen and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class and see how many answers students managed to guess correctly.

DẠ

Y

Optional activity: Listening - Teacher writes these questions on the board and puts students into pairs to predict the answers, then play the audio again for students to check and complete their answers.

(Students’ own answers.)

5. Listen again and choose the correct answers.

Suggested answers. 1. b 2. a 3. c

4. a

5. c

6. b

 Optional activity: Listening Question: 1. In what month is Stephanie going to visit Antarctica? 2. How many seasons are there in Antarctica? 3. What equipment is Stephanie going to take? 4. What is there going to be at the research centre?


Suggested answers. 1. November 2. Two (summer and winter) 3. Special clothes, waterproofs, sunglasses, water bottles, a penknife, sun cream, a tent, a sleeping bag and a special laptop 4. Telephones, computers, nice meals and hot water

QU Y

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

ƠN

OF

6. USE IT! Work in pairs. Choose a city for your next summer holiday. Ask and answer questions about the weather of that city. Use the phrases in the box and the words in exercise 1.

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the lesson. ❖ Contents: Students ask and answer questions about the weather of the city they choose. ❖ Products: Students’ conversation. ❖ Organization: Exercise 6: - Teacher reads through the prompts in the box and checks that students understand the four seasons. Elicit some possible questions about weather, for example: ? “What will the weather be like next week?” (With weaker classes, write some model questions on the board.) - Students ask and answer questions in pairs.

FI CI A

L

- Students listen to the audio and predict the answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

M

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 5: Language focus • First conditional • Complex sentences

L

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about conditions and their results. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Brainstorm ❖ Aims: Help students identify and understand the situation of using the past simple. ❖ Contents: Students write information about Alana and Tom. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher writes superstition ( mê tín dị đoan) on the board. Ask students to explain what superstition means, for example: “It’s something a lot of people believe, it’s a belief that something you see or do will lead to something good or bad happening.” Suggested answers. - Students answer on their own. - Superstition: It’s something a lot of people - Teacher elicits examples of superstitions believe, it’s a belief that something you see or do that they have heard of, for example: will lead to something good or bad happening. “When you put up an umbrella in the - Examples of superstitions: house, it means you’ll have bad luck. If you + When you put up an umbrella in the house, it see a black cat, you’ll be lucky.” means you’ll have bad luck.


OF

FI CI A

L

- Teacher encourages students that they don’t + If you see a black cat, you’ll be lucky. worry about what tenses they use to talk about the superstitions at this stage. (With weaker students, you can even ask them to use their own language.) 1. Study the examples in the table. In your notebook, complete the Rules with condition ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE and result. FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students identify, understand how to use the first conditional sentence. ❖ Contents: Students pay attention to the structures and complete the rules. ❖ Products: Students understand the structures and complete the rules. ❖ Organization: Example:

QU Y

NH

ƠN

Exercise 1: - Teacher guides students how to use the first conditional sentence. Elicit some examples and check that students understand the structure, then ask students to complete the Rules. - Students study the table, then complete the Rules. Suggested answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Rules: 2. condition 3. result

2. Choose the correct words.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students apply the knowledge they have learnt to do the tasks given. ❖ Contents: Students complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to read the text and choose the correct verb forms. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class. Ask them if they have heard of any of these superstitions. For consolidation, teacher could ask students to underline the conditions and circle the results in each sentence.

4. condition

Suggested answers. 1. ‘ll be 2. ‘re 3. put 4. see, will visit 5. ‘ll lose, have


L

3. The first conditional sentence is a kind of complex sentence. A complex sentence has ONE independent clause and at least one dependent clause.

ƠN

OF

FI CI A

 Grammar point: Dependent Clause (D.C) v.s Independent Clause (I.C) A dependent clause is a group of words that contains a subject and verb but does not express a complete thought but an independent clause is a group of words that contains a subject and verb and expresses a complete thought.

QU Y

NH

Exercise 3: - Teacher shows the clause “If you go to school today” and asks students if it expresses a complete thought. Make sure students say that it doesn’t express a complete thought. - Students answer. - Teacher shows the clause “you will meet an interesting person” and ask students if it expresses a complete thought. Make sure students say that it does express a complete thought. - Students answer. - Then, teacher shows the explanation: A dependent clause is a group of words that contains a subject and verb but does not express a complete thought but an independent clause is a group of words that contains a subject and verb and expresses a complete thought. - Teacher tells students to work in pairs and put I.C or D.C into the brackets. Ask them to compare the results. Make sure all students have the right answers. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher check answers with the class.

3. I.C – D.C

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Ask and answer first conditional questions. Use what, where and who, the words in the box and your own ideas.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way of using the first conditional sentence. ❖ Contents: Students ask and answer first conditional questions. ❖ Products: Students’ working. ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher reads the example question with the class. Elicit other possible answers to the example question. Ask students to work in pairs. - Students ask and answer the questions in pairs. (With weaker classes, teacher asks them to write out their questions first, and check them together before they go into their pairs.)

Suggested answers. 1. I.C – D.C 2. D.C – I.C

(Students’ own answers.)


FI CI A

L

 Finished? What horoscope sign is your partner? In your notebook, write a horoscope prediction for him or her.

OF

- Teacher monitors round the class and correct any errors. Put students in new pairs and get them to repeat the activity. Ask some students to tell the class about their partner’s plans. - Students give presentation. Finished? - When students have written their horoscopes, they can compare them with another fast finisher. - Teacher asks some students to read out their horoscopes to the rest of the class.

ƠN

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK -Learn by heart the structures. -Do exercises ( in workbook ) -Prepare for next lesson – Speaking.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Offers and promises

L

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY Lesson 6: Speaking

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - make offers and promises. - develop students’ speaking skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! Look at the photo of Zoe and Aaron. ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm and lead What do you think they are talking about? in new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students give prediction. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads the question with the class: ? “Look at the photo of Zoe and Aaron. What do you think they are talking about?” - Students answer on their own. - Teacher elicits a few answers from individual students, then leads in the new (Students’ own answers.) lesson.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students understand the situation in the dialogue. ❖ Contents: Students complete the dialogue. ❖ Products: Students’ answers.

1. Read the Skills Strategy. Then watch or listen and complete the dialogue with the words in the box. Who are they going to invite?


L 2. a picnic 4. my house

ƠN

OF

2. Watch or listen again. Which key phrases are for making offers and which are for making promises? Write O (offers) or P (promises). Then practise the dialogue with a partner.  Grammar point: - An offer: something you say you can do for someone. - A promise: something you say you will definitely do.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students make offers and promises as well as develop speaking skill. ❖ Contents: Students complete the tasks. ❖ Products: Students’ performance. ❖ Organization: While-speaking Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to read the Skills Strategy again before doing exercise 2. Check that students understand the difference between an offer (something you say you can do for someone) and a promise (something you say you will definitely do). Read through the key phrases with the class. Ask students to find the key phrases in the dialogue, then play the audio or video again. - Students decide if the key phrases are for making offers or promises. - Teacher checks answers with the class and checks that students understand all the key phrases. - Students then practise the dialogue in pairs.

FI CI A

❖ Organization: Pre-speaking Exercise 1: - Teacher reads the Skills Strategy with the class and allows students time to read the gapped dialogue. Check that students understand picnic. Play the video or audio for students to watch or listen and complete the Suggested answers. dialogue with the words in the box. 1. hot and sunny - Students listen and complete the dialogue 3. drinks with the words in the box. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

Post-speaking Exercise 3: - Teacher asks two confident students to read out the first mini-dialogue. Elicit the correct answer. Play the audio. - Students choose the correct answers for the remaining mini-dialogues.

Suggested answers. 1. O 2. O 5. O 6. P

3. P 7. P

4. P

3. Choose the correct responses in the minidialogues. Listen and check. Suggested answers. 1. I’ll ask Naomi to come too. 2. I’ll be there at three. 3. I can bring some chicken.


ƠN

OF

4. USE IT! Work in pairs. Look at the situations and choose A or B. Prepare and practise a new dialogue. Use the Key Phrases and the dialogue in exercise 1 to help you.

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the way of making offers and promises. ❖ Contents: Students work in pairs to make a new dialogue. ❖ Products: Students’ performance. ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to work in pairs to choose a situation and prepare a new dialogue. (With weaker classes, choose one of the situations and build up a dialogue with the class, asking students to contribute each line in turn.) - Students can then work in pairs to prepare a dialogue based on the other situation. - Teacher asks some pairs to perform their dialogues for the class. Ask other students to listen and note down how many offers and promises they hear.

FI CI A

Optional activity: Speaking - Teacher asks students to close their books.  Optional activity: Speaking Read out the first lines of the mini-dialogues from exercise 3 in a random order. See if (Students’ own answers.) students can remember the correct responses.

L

- Teacher plays the audio again for students to 4. won’t check their answers.

(Students’ own answers.)

M

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

FI CI A

L

Lesson 7: Writing A postcard

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - write a postcard about their visit. - develop students’ writing skill. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP  THINK! Imagine you are going on a trip to ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what another city. What interesting things are there they are going to study to do? ❖ Contents: Students talk about some interesting things that they want to do when they’re on a trip. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher reads out the question and elicits answers from individual students: ? “Imagine you are going on a trip to another city. What interesting things are there to do?” - Students answer on their own. More question: - Teacher asks more questions to encourage 1. What places are popular with tourists in your them to speak more, for example: ? “What places are popular with tourists in town or city? 2. Are there any interesting museums? your town or city? 3. What fun things can you do? Are there any interesting museums? 4. Are there any other towns or cities you could What fun things can you do? visit in your area?”


Are there any other towns or cities you could visit in your area?” - Students answer.

L

FI CI A

OF

Suggested answers. Adele is from the UK She is in Hà Nội now She is visiting Hoàn Kiếm Lake. 2. Complete the Key Phrases. Then look at the postcard and check your answers.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help student get to know how to write a postcard about their visit as well as develop writing skill. ❖ Contents: Students do the tasks given. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: While-writing Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to complete the key phrases from memory then check in the postcard. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher checks the answers with the class and checks that students understand all the key phrases.

1. Read the postcard. Where is Adele from? Where is she now? What is she doing?

ƠN

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students have an idea of writing a postcard about their visit. ❖ Contents: Students read the postcard and answer the questions. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Pre-writing Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to read the postcard and answer the questions. - Students work in pairs to answer the questions. - Teacher checks the answers with the class.

(Students’ own answers.)

DẠ

Y

- Teacher explains the language point and reads out the example, teacher could ask more examples from students. - Students pay attention to the structure.

Suggested answers. 1. a great time here 2. visiting Hoàn Kiếm Lake 3. to West Lake to go boating and enjoy bánh tôm 4. cool and wet 5. see you again in three days  Language Point: because Because ( bởi vì): dùng để đưa ra các nguyên nhân cho một điều, một sự việc gì đó. Theo sau “because” là một mệnh đề ( tức là phải có chủ ngữ (S), động từ (V)) Form : Because S + V + (O), S + V + (O) hoặc S + V + (O) because S + V + (O) Example:


It’s cool and wet because it’s in autumn.

 Optional activity: Writing Fill in the gaps. 1. I ……it won’t rain. 2. The weather will be hot, so we’re ……to swim or we’re ……to have a picnic.

QU Y

NH

Optional activity: Writing - Teacher writes the following gapped sentences on the board, then asks students to complete the sentences. - Students fill in the gaps. - Teacher checks answers with the class and checks that students understand that we use “I hope…” to express a wish about the future, and we use “be going to…” to talk about future plans. Encourage students to use these when they write their own email in exercise 4.

OF

Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to match sentences 1–5 with reasons a–e, then combine the sentences using “because”. - Students match the sentence halves and write sentences with because. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers. 1-e. I hope it will be hot tomorrow because I want to go to the beach. 2-b. We’re going to pack our suitcases because we’re going to go away tomorrow. 3-d. My brother wants to buy a guidebook because he’s going to travel to Japan in the summer. 4-a. Samir lives in France because his dad works there. 5-c. We’re going to take our waterproofs because it will be rainy on Saturday.

ƠN

Post-writing

FI CI A

L

3. Study the example. Match sentences 1–5 with reasons a–e. Then combine the sentences using “because”.

4. USE IT! Follow the steps in the writing guide.

DẠ

Y

M

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to write a postcard about their visit. ❖ Contents: Students think and plan. ❖ Products: Students’ writing. ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher reads the task with the class. - Students answer the questions and plan their postcard. - Teacher reads through the paragraph plan with the class and checks that students understand everything. - Students then write their postcard. (This can be set for homework.)

Suggested answers. 1. hope 2. going, going

(Students’ own answers.)


- Teacher reminds students to check their grammar, spelling and punctuation carefully.

FI CI A

L

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

FI CI A

Lesson 8: CULTURE Theme parks in Japan

L

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

DẠ

Y

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - talk about theme parks and rides. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teaching methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Brainstorm ❖ Aims: Help students brainstorm of what they are going to study ❖ Contents: Students answer the questions ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to close their book, and asks: ? “Do you like theme parks?” - Teacher checks that students understand what a theme park is, then ask: ? “Do you sometimes go to theme parks? Which ones do you go to? What kinds of rides do you like going on?” - Students answer on their own. (Students’ own answers.) - Teacher elicits a range of answers from individual students. ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION

1. Check the meanings of the words in the box. Then look at photos 1–4. What can you see in the photos?


L FI CI A

OF

2. What places can you find in a theme park?

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Help students understand a text about theme park. ❖ Contents: Students do the tasks given. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization:

 New words - cosplay (n): the practice of dressing up as a character from a movie, book, or video game. ( hóa trang) - thrill ride: trò chơi cảm giác mạnh - water ride: đạp vịt - rollercoaster: tàu lượn siêu tốc Suggested answers. 1. cosplay 2. water ride 3. rollercoaster 4. thrill ride

ƠN

❖ Aims: Help students identify the words related to theme park. ❖ Contents: Students match the words with the photos. ❖ Products: Students can identify the words. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to work in pairs to check the meanings of the words and decide what they can see in the photos. - Students work in pairs. - Teacher checks answers with the class and check that students understand all the words, then drill pronunciation.

M

QU Y

Exercise 2: - Teacher reads out the question and elicits a few possible answers, for example: restaurants, shops…. - Students then read and check their answers. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

DẠ

Y

Exercise 3: - Teacher asks students to read and listen to the text again and answer the questions. - Students read and listen to the text and answer the questions. - Teacher checks answers with the class.

Suggested answers. You can find rollercoasters, rides (thrill rides, family rides, water rides), shops, cafés, restaurants, shows and concerts. 3. Read and listen to the text and answer the questions. Suggested answers. 1. More than 100 2. 1983 3. No, they are very safe. 4. A thrill ride 5. You can dress up in historical costumes and visit attractions. 6. You can go shopping, have a drink or a meal.


4. YOUR CULTURE. Write about a theme park in your country. Use the internet to help you find the information you need.

OF

FI CI A

L

Exercise 4: - Teacher help students brainstorms some theme parks in the students’ own country. - Students then choose a theme park, find information about it online and complete the table. (Students can do this in class if they have access to the internet, or for homework.)

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION (Students’ own answers.) ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate how to talk about theme parks . ❖ Contents: Students tell the partner about the theme park. 5. USE IT! Work in pairs. Tell your partner ❖ Products: Students’ working. about your theme park in exercise 4. ❖ Organization: Exercise 4: - Teacher asks students to work in pairs to tell each other about their theme parks. Ask some pairs to tell the class about one of the theme parks they talked about. - Students work in pairs tell each other about their theme parks. - Teacher discusses as a class which theme parks look the most exciting and why. (Students’ own answers.) ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Week : Period:

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

UNIT 8: GOING AWAY

FI CI A

L

Lesson 9: Options Puzzles and games

M

QU Y

NH

ƠN

OF

I./. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - revise all lessons in Unit 8. - develop students’ skills. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. 3. Attitude: Students know how to learn English in right way. 4. Competence: Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language…… II./. PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: book, planning, TV 2.Students: books, notebooks III./. TEACHING METHODS: Communicative approach, group Ss and T’s activities, play as a character, teaching methods with game, teaching methods by visual, teach ing methods by practicing, discussion group, technical present…. IV./.PROCEDURE: 1.Check – up : during the lesson. 2.New lesson Teacher’s and Students’ activities Contents ACTIVITY 1: WARM-UP Game: “HANGMAN” ❖ Aims: Help students warm-up and lead in the new lesson. ❖ Contents: Students work groups to play the game. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher divides the class into small groups. Instruct students how to play the game. Suggested answers. Encourage students to attend in the game as a 1. vehicles race. 2. move - Students follow teacher’s instructions and 3. ride complete the task in groups. 4. wheels - Teacher checks the answers with the whole class.

DẠ

Y

ACTIVITY 2 : KNOWLEDGE FORMATION ❖ Aims: Help students revise some vocabularies related to sports.

1. How do you travel on your holiday? Add vowel(s) (A, E, I, O or U) to the words in the bus. Then write the words.


L FI CI A

OF

3. BOAT 4. CAR 7. CABLE CAR

2. Work in pairs. Use the code to complete the weather forecast. Then use the code to write a weather forecast for your partner.

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 3: PRACTICE ❖ Aims: Students can use their knowledge which they have learnt to do the tasks given as well as develop skills ❖ Contents: Students complete the weather forecast and play board game. ❖ Products: Students’ performance. ❖ Organization: Exercise 2: - Teacher asks students to work individually or in pairs to use the code to complete the weather forecast. Explain to students that, for each word, they must use the code to find the missing letters, then put the letters in the correct order. (With stronger classes, teacher could do this as a race.) - Students work individually or in pairs to use the code to complete the weather forecast. - Teacher checks answers with the class. - Students then use the code to write a weather forecast for their partner.

Suggested answers. 1. BUS 2. TRAM 5. PLANE 6. FERRY 8. SUBWAY TRAIN

ƠN

❖ Contents: Students work in groups to complete the task. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: Exercise 1: - Teacher asks students to work individually or in pairs to add vowels to the words and then write them. (With stronger classes, teacher could do this as a race.) - Students work individually or in pairs to add vowels to the words and then write them. - Teacher checks answers with the class. (As an extension, students could work in pairs and write three more words from page 96 without vowels. They could swap with another pair and try to write the words.)

Suggested answers. 1. cold 2. rainy 3. windy

4. sunny

DẠ

Y

3. A BOARD GAME. Work in pairs. You need a dice. Take turns rolling the dice and Exercise 3: - Teacher reads through the instructions with moving from START to FINISH. If you land the class and makes sure students know what on a blue, red or green square, follow the instructions in the coloured box.


FI CI A OF ƠN

SHARING

M

QU Y

NH

ACTIVITY 4. PRODUCTION ❖ Aims: Help students consolidate the knowledge which they have learnt. ❖ Contents: Students revise the lesson. ❖ Products: Students’ answers. ❖ Organization: - Teacher asks students to work in groups and discuss what they learned in Unit 8. - Students work in group. - Teacher gives students time to discuss in groups and write down their opinions. - Students discuss in group and write down their opinions. - Teacher calls out some students to present their opinions in front of class. - Students present their opinions in front of class. - Teacher gives feedback.

L

they have to do. Explain that when they land on a blue, red or green square, they roll the dice again and then answer the question or follow the instruction based on the number that they roll. - Students play the game in pairs. (As an extension, brainstorm some different questions using will and be going to, and write them on the board. Students could play the game again using the new questions. Alternatively, students could work in pairs and write different questions using will and be going to. They could then swap questions with another pair and play the game again.)

(Students own’s answers.)

ACTIVITY 5. HOMEWORK - Do exercises (in workbook). - Prepare new lesson.

DẠ

Y

Feedback:...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................


Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.